DS92UT16TUF/NOPB [TI]

SPECIALTY INTERFACE CIRCUIT, PBGA196;
DS92UT16TUF/NOPB
型号: DS92UT16TUF/NOPB
厂家: TEXAS INSTRUMENTS    TEXAS INSTRUMENTS
描述:

SPECIALTY INTERFACE CIRCUIT, PBGA196

接口集成电路
文件: 总111页 (文件大小:2002K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
DS92UT16 UTOPIA-LVDS Bridge for 1.6 Gbps Bi-directional Data Transfers  
Check for Samples: DS92UT16  
1
FEATURES  
Embedded Bidirectional, Non-Blocking Flow  
Control Over Serial Link for per MPHY Back  
Pressure  
23  
832 Mbps LVDS 16-bit Serializer and  
Deserializer Interface  
No External Memories Required  
Suitable for Cable, Printed Circuit Board,  
and Backplane Transmission Paths  
Embedded OAM Channel Over Serial Link  
Remote Alarm/Status Indications  
Link Trace Label  
10m Cable at Max LVDS Data Rate and  
Greater than 16m at Min LVDS Data Rate  
Embedded Clock With Random Data Lock  
Capability for Clock Recovery  
PRBS (x31 + x28 + 1) Based LVDS Link BER  
Test Facility  
Embedded Control Channel With Flow  
Control for Software Communication  
BIP16 Based Error Performance Monitoring  
In Protected Systems, the Standby Link  
OAM Channel is Available for Embedded  
Communications and Performance/Alarm  
Monitoring  
Two Independent LVDS Receiver Serial  
Ports for Optional 1:1 Protection  
Main and Redundant LVDS Transmit Ports  
Multiple Loop-Back Options  
Loop Timing Capability Enables LVDS  
Recovered Clock to Internally Drive LVDS  
Transmit Clock  
Standard Microprocessor Interface (Intel and  
Motorola Compatible)  
IEEE 1149.1 JTAG® Port  
Internal Buffers Allow Maximum LVDS  
Serial Bit Rate Independent of UTOPIA  
Clock Rate  
Temperature Range: 40°C to +85°C  
CMOS Technology for Low Power  
Programmable UTOPIA Interface  
LVDS Transceiver Section uses 3.3V Power  
Supply. Digital UTOPIA Section uses 2.5V  
Power Supply. All I/O are 3.3V Tolerant.  
UTOPIA Level 2 Up To 52 MHz  
ATM Layer or PHY Layer Interface  
ATM Layer Interface Can Support Up To  
248 Standard Level 2 PHY Ports With no  
Additional External Circuitry. Configured as  
31 MPHY’s, each With Up To 8 Sub-Ports  
196 LBGA Package, 15x15x1.37 mm, 1.0 mm  
Ball Pitch  
Supports Extended Cell Size Up To 64  
Bytes  
Supports 16- or 8-Bit Data Buses With  
Parity  
1
Please be aware that an important notice concerning availability, standard warranty, and use in critical applications of  
Texas Instruments semiconductor products and disclaimers thereto appears at the end of this data sheet.  
2
3
JTAG is a registered trademark of JTAG.  
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
PRODUCTION DATA information is current as of publication date.  
Products conform to specifications per the terms of the Texas  
Instruments standard warranty. Production processing does not  
necessarily include testing of all parameters.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
The serial interface uses LVDS Serializer and  
Deserializer technology. The 16:1 bit serialization  
allows conveying the full-duplex parallel bus over two  
differential transmission pairs. This enables low cost  
backplanes and cables. Cable transmission length  
can be as long 16 meters.  
DESCRIPTION  
The DS92UT16 is a flexible UTOPIA to LVDS Bridge  
device. The LVDS Bridge transparently transports the  
UTOPIA bus over a high speed LVDS serial link. The  
device includes many reliability features such as an  
optional 1:1 protection and built in bit error rate  
checking.  
The serial link carries Flow control information (back  
pressure) in both directions. The Bridge device  
applies back pressure on a per queue basis over the  
31 internal FIFO queues. In addition, the serial link  
includes an OAM (Operations and Maintenance)  
channel that does not detract from link performance.  
The parallel interface is user programmable for  
maximum flexibility. The user can choose between  
UTOPIA Level Level 2 ATM layer (master) of PHY  
layer (slave). The UTOPIA-LVDS Bridge supports a  
special MPHY (multi-PHY layer) operation mode. The  
MPHY operation supports up to 248 standard  
UTOPIA Level 2 PHY ports without adding external  
circuitry.  
There are many applications where the UTOPIA-  
LVDS Bridge simplifies designs. Box-to-box  
connections can use DS29UT16 devices across  
cables. Access multiplexor applications can use the  
devices across a PCB backplane for point-to-point  
and lightly loaded multidrop configurations.  
Block Diagram  
Figure 1. DS92UT16 Block Diagram  
2
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
Application Overview  
Figure 2. Application Example  
The UTOPIA interface [See References] is an established standard for connecting Physical Layer devices to  
ATM Layer devices. However, when the ATM Layer device and the Physical Layer device(s) are on separate  
cards within a piece of equipment, or even on separate equipment, then the parallel nature of this standard  
becomes a limiting factor. See Figure 2.  
The solution is to use the DS92UT16, which is a transparent bridge that extends the UTOPIA bus over a serial  
LVDS interface, and is suitable for backplanes and cables. Full bidirectional flow control is incorporated, allowing  
back-pressure to be applied to the source of the ATM cells. The 31 PHY ports available with standard UTOPIA  
Level 2 may be extended to 248 ports without additional external circuitry. The DS92UT16 achieves this by  
providing as many as 8 ENB and CLAV signals in both receive and transmit directions when acting as the ATM  
Layer device. This allows addressing 248 PHYs that are configured as up to 31 ports that each have as many as  
8 sub-ports.  
To aid equipment management and maintenance, the DS92UT16 passes an embedded ‘Operations,  
Administration and Maintenance' (OAM) channel over the serial link. In addition, the device provides a number of  
loopback options that are both traffic affecting (line loopbacks) and non-traffic affecting (cell loopbacks), which  
simplify testing and diagnostic activities.  
The DS92UT16 has a modified Bus LVDS serial output for driving cables in point-to-point applications. The cable  
length depends on the quality of the cable and the data rate. Increasing the cable quality, or lowering the LVDS  
data rate, increases the maximum possible cable length the device will drive.  
When examining the trade-offs that determine the DS92UT16 maximum cable drive capability, it is important to  
understand that the LVDS data rate on the cable is 18 times (16 bits plus 2 embedded clock bits) the  
LVDS_TxClk rate. For example, a 35 MHz LVDS_TxClk will produce a 630 Mbps data rate, and a 52 MHz clock  
will produce a 936 Mbps data rate. When using twinaxial grade differential cable, the cable length can be as long  
as 16m for the 35 MHz clock and approximately 10m for the 52 MHz clock.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
3
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION  
UTOPIA INTERFACE  
The DS92UT16 has an industry standard UTOPIA interface [1.] supporting Level 2 and Extended Level 2  
operation. Depending on its position in the bridge link, it may operate as either the ATM layer or the physical  
layer in the UTOPIA protocol.  
In Level 2 mode, this interface can be either a 16-bit or an 8-bit wide data path, with both octet and cell level  
handshaking and operating at a frequency as high as 52 MHz, facilitating 622 Mbps (STM4/OC12) line rates.  
In UTOPIA Level 2 mode, the device supports Multi-PHY (MPHY) operation, whereby up to 31 PHY ports may  
be connected to an ATM device. The presence of cells and availability of buffer space is indicated using the  
CLAV signals.  
UTOPIA Level 2 defines 1 ENB and 1 CLAV signal in each direction. The DS92UT16 has extended this to 8 ENB  
and 8 CLAV signals, which enables up to 248 PHY ports to be connected to an ATM device without additional  
external circuitry as shown in Figure 3.  
Note: The full connections for a single sub-port are shown in Figure 4.  
Figure 3. Extended UTOPIA Level 2 for 248 PHY Ports  
4
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
Figure 4. Detailed Connection of One Sub-Port for Extended UTOPIA Level 2  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
5
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
For the purposes of queueing, the 248 PHY ports are configured as sub-ports of the standard 31 ports so each  
port/queue has 8 sub-ports as discussed in Up-Bridge Multi-Port Traffic Buffer. Each MPHY address corresponds  
to a port.  
The 5 bit MPHY can address up to 31 PHY ports. At least 3 additional bits are required to give the total of 8 bits  
necessary for addressing 248 PHY ports. These additional address bits can be provided by the user in any of the  
User Prepend, Cell Header or UDF1/2 bytes of the cell as shown in Figure 6. The DS92UT16 is configured to  
extract/insert the extra address bits from/to any of these bytes.  
PHY polling may be carried out as follows:  
Standard UTOPIA Level 2 with 1 CLAV signal.  
One CLAV polling 31 PHY ports.  
DS92UT16 Extended UTOPIA Level 2 with up to 8 CLAV signals.  
Each CLAV can poll 31 PHY ports giving a total of 248 PHY ports.  
Multiple UTOPIA-LVDS bridge devices can be used in parallel to share up to 31 PHY ports among PHYs that are  
on separate line cards Figure 5. Each of these ports may have up to 8 sub-ports. There are constraints on the  
number of port addresses used per bridge in such a configuration. See MULTIPLE BRIDGE MTB  
CONFIGURATION  
Note: Default MTB queue thresholds must be changed to use this configuration. See MULTIPLE BRIDGE MTB  
CONFIGURATION  
Figure 5. Multi-Bridge System Example  
6
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
Parity generation and checking is available in all modes.  
To support systems where routing tags and/or padding are added to the ATM cells at a previous device, the  
UTOPIA interface on DS92UT16 may be programmed to handle non-standard ATM cells of length 52 bytes up to  
64 bytes. See Figure 6. In all cases, the Start Of Cell (SOC) signal must correspond to the first byte or word of  
the extended cell.  
Back-to-back cell transfer is supported in all modes.  
When configured as an ATM layer device, receive polling and transmit polling of those Ports with queued cells is  
Round-Robin. The DS92UT16 will only poll those PHY ports configured as active.  
TRAFFIC BUFFERS  
Down-Bridge FIFO  
In the down-bridge direction, a simple 3 cell FIFO (with 30 cell overhead) is used to rate adapt the data from the  
UTOPIA clock domain to the LVDS clock domain for transmission. Per port queuing and back pressure/flow  
control is handled by the corresponding up-bridge Multi-port Traffic Buffer in the far end DS92UT16 device as  
described in Up-Bridge Multi-Port Traffic Buffer and Flow Control.  
Up-Bridge Multi-Port Traffic Buffer  
In the up-bridge direction, a 160 cell linked list buffer is shared across up to 31 port queues. This is called the  
Multi-port Traffic Buffer. Although each MPHY may be connected to 8 sub-ports/PHY's, the MTB has a single  
queue per MPHY port, as it only uses the 5-bit MPHY address and does not access the sub-port address bits.  
Each port has a programmable upper fill threshold. In the up-bridge direction, queue overflow is avoided through  
the means of a per queue flow control protocol embedded in the LVDS link as described in Flow Control. Should  
any queue reach this upper threshold, back-pressure is applied via the flow control mechanism over the serial  
link to the down-bridge (transmitting) device which uses the normal UTOPIA flow control handshaking to prevent  
any more cells being transferred and thus prevent overflow.  
The individual queue per port architecture ensures that the flow control is non-blocking across the 31 ports.  
However, the 8 sub-ports within each port can be blocking.  
Furthermore, as is the nature of link-list buffers, each queue may be over-assigned memory space, working on  
the assumption that not every queue will back up simultaneously. To accommodate the rare occasions where the  
buffer as a whole approaches full but individual queues are below their full threshold, the device also compares  
the overall buffer fill against a threshold. The flow control mechanism provides a global ‘halt' command to ensure  
that no cells will be lost if the overall buffer should approach the overflow condition.  
TRANSMISSION CONVERGENCE SUB-LAYER (TCS)  
In the down-bridge direction, the Transmission Convergence Sub-layer (TCS) Assembler performs cell rate de-  
coupling. The TCS Assembler then prepares the cells for transport over the LVDS link by packaging them within  
link Transport Containers (TC).  
In the up-bridge direction, the TCS Disassemblers unpack the link transport containers and route the cells to the  
Multi-port Traffic Buffer.  
MPHY address, flow control, and OAM information is embedded within the link transport containers.  
Cell Rate Decoupling  
In the down-bridge direction, the TCS Assembler inserts idle cells when no valid traffic cells are available from  
the FIFO for onward transmission. In the up-bridge direction, the TCS Disassembler rejects all received idle cells.  
Link Transport Container (TC)  
The ATM cells received on the UTOPIA interface can be standard or user-specified cells. Cell length is  
programmable from 52 to 64 bytes. These cells are treated as Protocol Data Units (PDU), which are packaged  
into Transport Containers (TC) for transmission over the serial link. In the reverse direction, the cell PDUs are  
unpacked from the link TCs before being passed out on the UTOPIA interface.  
This is illustrated in Figure 6.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
7
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
The PDU fields are configured as shown in Table 1. The total PDU cell length must be in the range of 52 to 64  
bytes. In addition, variable length fields must be programmed to an even number of bytes because the  
DS92UT16 operates with an internal 16 bit data path. The total number of bytes defined for User Prepend plus  
UDF1/2 and User Append must not exceed 12 bytes to maintain the maximum PDU cell length of 64 bytes.  
Table 1. PDU Cell Format Options  
Fixed/  
Variable  
Field  
Bytes  
User Prepend  
Cell Header  
UDF1/2  
Variable  
0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12  
4
Fixed  
Variable  
(On/Off)  
2, 0 in 16 bit mode  
1, 0 in 8 bit mode  
Payload  
Fixed  
48  
User Append  
Variable  
0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12  
Although the UDF1/2 bytes will always be present, the DS92UT16 can be programmed to either transport these  
bytes or ignore them. If they are to be ignored, then the TCS strips them out in the down-bridge direction and the  
UTOPIA up-bridge section inserts a HEC byte in UDF 1. Otherwise, they can be transported transparently the  
same as any other PDU byte.  
Figure 6. PDU and Link Transport Container Format  
Each link TC has an MPHY address byte, two Flow Control (F) Channel bytes, and a HEC byte in addition to the  
PDU cell. The two F1 and F2 bytes per TC constitute the F Channel, which is used for flow control and OAM  
purposes over the link. The TCS uses the HEC byte for container delineation, frame delineation, and cell header  
error detection.  
MPHY Tagging and Routing  
In the down-bridge direction, the DS92UT16 adds an additional byte (MPHY byte) to each PDU. It contains the  
MPHY port address associated with that PDU, as shown in Table 2.  
Table 2. MPHY Byte  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Function  
MPHY Port Address 0–31  
Reserved  
At the other end of the link, this byte is used to route the incoming PDU from the LVDS interface to the  
appropriate MPHY port queue.  
8
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
 
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
Transport Container Delineation and Error Monitoring  
In the down-bridge direction, the device calculates and inserts the HEC byte using the CRC-8 polynomial x8 + x2  
+ x + 1 and optional coset x6 + x4 + x2 + 1 defined in I.432.1 [2.]. The HEC byte is calculated over the preceding  
7–19 bytes, which make up the link TC header. To aid delineation at the far end, the entire contents of the TC,  
excluding the HEC, are scrambled and the HEC is calculated on the scrambled TC header. A scrambler using  
the pseudo-random sequence polynomial x31 + x28 + 1 defined in I.432.1 [2.] is used.  
In the up-bridge direction, the device determines the cell delineation within the received data by locking onto the  
HEC byte within the transport container, using the algorithm specified in I.432.1 [2.].  
During normal operation in the up-bridge direction, the device monitors the HEC bytes for errors, with an option  
to reject cells containing errored HEC’s. A performance metric on the number of errored cells detected is  
maintained.  
Although the HEC byte normally over-writes the UDF1 byte before cells are passed out over a physical medium,  
the DS92UT16 has the option to retain the UDF1 and UDF2 information fields in order to provide a truly  
transparent UTOPIA bridge. If it is not necessary to pass the UDF1/2 bytes between the ATM and PHY devices  
at either end of the link, then the user has the option to suppress them to improve link efficiency.  
Furthermore, in order to easily share-out the F Channel bandwidth between flow control and various OAM  
functions, the DS92UT16 uses a frame structure as shown in F Channel Byte Usage Within the Frame. A frame  
contains 56 transport containers with ATM cells. The start of frame is indicated by the HEC byte of TC0, which  
has had the coset x6 + x4 + x2 + 1 added to it. This differentiates the start of frame HEC from the normal cell  
HEC’s.  
Flow Control  
The flow control mechanism within the DS92UT16 enables applying back-pressure to the source of the ATM  
cells in both directions. The flow control works independently per queue for all 31 queues. It uses a simple  
‘halt/send’ command per PHY Port. At the destination buffer, the fill level of each Port queue is examined against  
a programmed threshold. Should the threshold be reached, a halt command is returned to the source, which  
prevents any more cells being sent to that Port until a ‘send’ command is subsequently received. Only the Port in  
question is affected, so this is a non-blocking protocol over the normal 31 Ports. However, the 8 sub-ports within  
a Port do not have individual flow control. This means a sub-port can block other sub-ports within that Port.  
Since a regular flow control opportunity is provided via the F1/F2 bytes of the F Channel, only a small amount of  
headroom need be reserved to allow for latency in this protocol. Furthermore, should a number of PHY ports  
approach their limit simultaneously and/or the overall buffer approach a defined global threshold, a global halt  
may be issued, temporarily blocking all traffic.  
The global halt/send command also allows the user to safely maximize the use of the shared buffer by over-  
assigning the memory among the Ports.  
The flow control command is illustrated in Table 3. Each port is assigned a control bit in specified F-bytes within  
the frame structure, as shown in F Channel Byte Usage Within the Frame. Within the F byte logic, 1 represents a  
‘halt’ command to that port and logic 0 represents a ‘send’ command. A global halt is indicated by all ports  
containing a halt command. The msb of Flow Control 3 byte is reserved.  
Table 3. Flow Control Coding Within the F Bytes  
Flow  
Flow  
Flow  
Flow  
Control 3  
Control 2  
Control 1  
Control 0  
Res  
Ports 30–24 Ports 23–16 Ports 15–8  
Ports 7–0  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
9
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
F Channel Byte Usage Within the Frame  
For the majority of time, the F Channel F1/F2 bytes are used as a flow control opportunity, providing a rapid  
throttle-back mechanism as described in Flow Control. In addition, a small number of F bytes are stolen in a  
regular fashion to provide a low bandwidth OAM channel. This is controlled by the TC number within the frame,  
as illustrated in Table 4. Hence, an OAM channel is formed by the F1/F2 bytes in TCs 6, 13, 20, 27, 34, 41, 48  
and 55, with the F1/F2 bytes in the remaining containers forming a flow control signaling channel.  
Table 4. F Channel Byte Usage Within the Frame  
TC0  
TC1  
TC2  
TC3  
TC4  
TC5  
TC6  
Flow Control 3  
Flow Control 2  
Flow Control 1  
Flow Control 0  
Flow Control 3  
Flow Control 2  
Flow Control 1  
Flow Control 0  
Flow Control 3  
Flow Control 2  
Flow Control 1  
Flow Control 0  
Alarm/Sig.  
Link Labels  
TC7  
Flow Control 3  
Flow Control 2  
TC8  
Flow Control 1  
Flow Control 0  
TC9  
Flow Control 3  
Flow Control 2  
TC10  
Flow Control 1  
Flow Control 0  
TC11  
Flow Control 3  
Flow Control 2  
TC12  
Flow Control 1  
Flow Control 0  
TC13  
ECC1  
ECC2  
TC14  
Flow Control 3  
Flow Control 2  
TC15  
Flow Control 1  
Flow Control 0  
TC16  
Flow Control 3  
Flow Control 2  
TC17  
Flow Control 1  
Flow Control 0  
TC18  
Flow Control 3  
Flow Control 2  
TC19  
Flow Control 1  
Flow Control 0  
TC20  
ECC3  
ECC4  
TC21  
TC22  
TC23  
TC24  
TC25  
TC26  
TC27  
Flow Control 3  
Flow Control 2  
Flow Control 1  
Flow Control 0  
Flow Control 3  
Flow Control 2  
Flow Control 1  
Flow Control 0  
Flow Control 3  
Flow Control 2  
Flow Control 1  
Flow Control 0  
BIP16  
TC28  
TC29  
TC30  
TC31  
TC32  
TC33  
TC34  
Flow Control 3  
Flow Control 2  
Flow Control 1  
Flow Control 0  
Flow Control 3  
Flow Control 2  
Flow Control 1  
Flow Control 0  
Flow Control 3  
Flow Control 2  
Flow Control 1  
Flow Control 0  
Reserved  
TC35  
Flow Control 3  
Flow Control 2  
TC36  
Flow Control 1  
Flow Control 0  
TC37  
Flow Control 3  
Flow Control 2  
TC38  
Flow Control 1  
Flow Control 0  
TC39  
Flow Control 3  
Flow Control 2  
TC40  
Flow Control 1  
Flow Control 0  
TC41  
ECC5  
ECC6  
TC42  
Flow Control 3  
Flow Control 2  
TC43  
Flow Control 1  
Flow Control 0  
TC44  
Flow Control 3  
Flow Control 2  
TC45  
Flow Control 1  
Flow Control 0  
TC46  
Flow Control 3  
Flow Control 2  
TC47  
Flow Control 1  
Flow Control 0  
TC48  
ECC7  
ECC8  
TC49  
TC50  
TC51  
TC52  
TC53  
TC54  
TC55  
Flow Control 3  
Flow Control 2  
Flow Control 1  
Flow Control 0  
Flow Control 3  
Flow Control 2  
Flow Control 1  
Flow Control 0  
Flow Control 3  
Flow Control 2  
Flow Control 1  
Flow Control 0  
BIP16  
OAM Channel  
Remote Alarm and Signaling Byte  
A byte-wide remote alarm and signaling channel is carried in the F1 byte in TC6 as shown in F Channel Byte  
Usage Within the Frame. This provides a means for the device at the far end of the LVDS link to signal an alarm  
condition to the near end and vise-versa. This byte also contains the ECC flow control signals. The format of this  
byte is as shown in Table 5 below. Bit [0] is reserved.  
Table 5. Remote Alarm and Signaling Byte  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Function  
RLOSA  
RLOSB  
RBA  
RDSLL  
EVN  
ESSA  
ESSB  
Res  
• RLOSA Remote Loss Of Signal lock at far end device receive port A.  
• RLOSB Remote Loss Of Signal lock at far end device receive port B.  
• RBA Remote far end device active receive port. Set = remote receive port B active and Clear = remote receive  
port A active.  
• RDSLL Remote far end device active port Descrambler Loss of Lock. Set = Out of lock and Clear = In lock.  
• EVN ECC Tx Data Valid/Null indication.  
• ESSA ECC RxA Stop/Start indication.  
• ESSB ECC RxB Stop/Send indication.  
10  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
 
 
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
The status of the received RLOSA, RLOSB, RBA and RDSSL bits is reflected in the RARA register for receive  
port A and in RBRA for receive port B. See RECEIVE PORT A REMOTE STATUS AND ALARMS—0x3C RARA  
and RECEIVE PORT B REMOTE STATUS AND ALARMS—0x7C RBRA for descriptions of these registers.  
The function of the ECC signaling bits EVN, ESSA, and ESSB is described in Embedded Communication  
Channel Operation.  
Link Trace Label Byte  
Also, in TC6 a byte-wide link trace label is carried in the F2 byte as shown in F Channel Byte Usage Within the  
Frame. This allows the user to verify link connectivity, which is especially useful when a number of cable links  
are being used. The DS92UT16 may be programmed with both a link label value to transmit and an expected link  
label. Should the received link label not match the expected value, an alarm interrupt may be raised.  
The received Link Label byte is software accessible and an interrupt may be raised on a change of received Link  
Label byte. So the Link Label byte may also be used as a user defined channel to pass one byte per frame  
across the link.  
Embedded Communications Channel (ECC)  
An Embedded Communications Channel is provided over the link for software messaging, download, etc. in the  
F1/F2 bytes of TCs 13, 20, 41 and 48 as shown in Table 4. The ECC byte contents are not processed by the  
DS92UT16. Hence the DS92UT16 is transparent to and does not restrict the system messaging protocol.  
The ECC consists of an 8 byte Tx Buffer with corresponding Tx Buffer Ready and Tx Buffer Send flags, and an 8  
byte Rx Buffer with a corresponding Rx Buffer Full Flag. All bytes of the buffers are software read/write  
accessible. Tx Buffer Ready is read only.  
At the ECC transmit side, the reset state sets the Tx Buffer Ready flag and clears the Tx Buffer Send flag. Then  
the software assembles a message for transmission in the Tx Buffer. To send a message, the software simply  
sets Tx Buffer Send, which automatically clears Tx Buffer Ready. The contents of the Tx Buffer are transmitted to  
the far-end. The Tx Buffer will automatically be retransmitted until the far-end indicates that it has been  
successfully received. When notified by the far end of successful reception, Tx Buffer Ready is set and an  
interrupt raised to the software to indicate successful transmission. A new message may now be assembled in  
the Tx Buffer and transmitted by setting Tx Buffer Send. As all the Tx Buffer bytes are read/ write, the message  
to be transmitted can be assembled in any order and read back by the software before transmission. The same  
message can be retransmitted simply by setting Tx Buffer Send again.  
At the ECC receive side, the reset state clears the Rx Buffer Full flag. When all 8 bytes of a message have been  
successfully received and stored in the Rx Buffer, the Rx Buffer Full flag is set and an interrupt raised. As all the  
Rx Buffer bytes are read/write, the message can be read in any order by the software. A new message will not  
overwrite the current received message until the Rx Buffer Full flag is cleared by the software indicating that the  
current Rx Buffer has been read and a new message can be received.  
The ECC data flow is controlled across the link using the EVN, ESSA, and ESSB bits of the Remote Alarm and  
Signaling byte (see Remote Alarm and Signaling Byte).  
As there are two independent LVDS receive ports, the DS92UT16 has two independent ECC receive sections.  
These are assigned to the LVDS receive ports Port A and Port B. The ECC of the standby link may therefore be  
used for software communication.  
Embedded Communication Channel Operation describes the operation and control of the ECC in detail.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
11  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
BIP16  
A Bit-Interleaved-Parity mechanism provides a live error performance metric on the LVDS link. A BIP16 value is  
calculated over a previous block of 28 containers and inserted in the F1/F2 bytes of containers 27 and 55, as  
shown in F Channel Byte Usage Within the Frame. At the far end, the re-calculated BIP16 values are compared  
against the received values. Any bit errors in this comparison are counted. Should the number of errors exceed a  
programmed threshold, then an interrupt may be raised.  
F Channel (Flow Control and OAM) Bandwidth Analysis  
This section analyses the bandwidth used by the various components of the F Channel. The figures are  
dependent upon the link bandwidth and the size of the PDU/ATM cells being carried in the Transport Containers.  
This illustration is restricted to 800 Mbps and PDU sizes of 52 and 64 bytes. By adding the 4 bytes for the F  
Channel, the TCs are then 56 and 68 bytes respectively.  
Table 6 illustrates the number of bytes used for each function in the F Channel. The top row gives the total  
number of Transport Containers per Frame as 56. It then shows the number of bytes in each Frame for OAM  
and Flow Control. There is a total of 112 bytes in each Frame for the F Channel.  
Table 7 shows the bit rate used by each portion of the F Channel. The larger 68 byte container uses a lower  
proportion of the channel bandwidth for F Channel functions.  
Table 8 shows the percentage of the channel bandwidth used for each of the functions. The total F Channel  
bandwidth is only 3.57% of total bandwidth even with the smaller container size.  
Table 6. F Channel Bandwidth—Bytes  
Number of Transport Containers in Frame (8 rows x 7  
columns)  
56  
Bytes per Frame for Remote Alarms and signaling  
Bytes per Frame for Link Label  
Bytes per Frame for ECC  
1
1
8
Bytes per Frame Reserved  
2
Bytes per Frame for BIP16  
4
Bytes per Frame for OAM  
16  
96  
112  
Bytes per Frame for Flow Control  
Bytes per Frame for F Channel  
Table 7. F Channel Bandwidth—Mbps  
Link BW - Mbps  
800  
56  
800  
Container Size - Bytes  
Remote Alarm BW - Mbps  
Link Label BW - Mbps  
ECC BW - Mbps  
68  
0.26  
0.26  
2.04  
0.51  
1.02  
4.08  
24.49  
28.57  
0.21  
0.21  
1.68  
0.42  
0.84  
3.36  
20.17  
23.53  
Reserved BW - Mbps  
BIP16 BW - Mbps  
OAM BW - Mbps  
Flow Control BW - Mbps  
F Channel BW - Mbps  
12  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
 
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
Table 8. F Channel Bandwidth—Percentage  
Link BW - Mbps  
800  
56  
800  
Container Size - Bytes  
Remote Alarm BW%  
Link Label BW%  
ECC BW%  
68  
0.03  
0.03  
0.26  
0.06  
0.13  
0.51  
3.06  
3.57  
0.03  
0.03  
0.21  
0.05  
0.10  
0.42  
2.52  
2.94  
Reserved BW%  
BIP16 BW%  
OAM BW%  
Flow Control BW%  
F Channel BW%  
LVDS PHYSICAL INTERFACE  
The DS92UT16 provides one dual transmit and two independent receive high speed LVDS serial interfaces with  
800 Mbps bandwidth. The LVDS Interface transmits and receives data over lightly loaded backplanes or up to  
10m of cable. The single transmit block drives two pairs of differential outputs with independent TRI-STATE  
controls for each. The same data is transmitted over both pairs of transmit pins. The two serial receive interfaces  
are completely separate and independent and are denoted Port A and Port B. Only one receive port is selected  
for traffic at any one time. This is designated the Active Port. The Standby receive port may be powered down.  
Alternatively, the Standby receive port’s OAM channel can be made available for software communications using  
the ECC, and for link performance monitoring. This allows the condition of the Standby link to be determined.  
The LOCK status of both Active and Standby ports is monitored automatically.  
The transmitted data stream contains embedded clock information. The receiver’s clock recovery circuit locks  
onto the embedded clock in either a random data pattern, or by instructing the transmitter to send SYNCH  
patterns. The DS92LV16 can send SYNCH patterns on power-up or when synchronization is lost. The latter  
option requires a feedback loop in either hardware or software between the transmitter and the receiver, but has  
the benefit of a faster lock time. The LOCK status of both receive ports is reflected on external pins and  
alarm/status bits that are readable via the microprocessor port. The LOCK status, along with the currently active  
port, is transmitted to the far-end receiver via the Remote Alarm and Signaling byte of the OAM channel as  
described in Remote Alarm and Signaling Byte. The recovered clocks of both receive ports are available on  
external pins.  
A Loop Timing option is available whereby the LVDS transmit clock can be sourced directly from the recovered  
clock of the active receiver, rather than from the external transmit clock input pin.  
The transmit port and two receive ports may be independently powered down via microprocessor control.  
Similarly, the device may be forced to send SYNCH patterns on the transmit port via microprocessor control.  
To assist in designer testing and system commissioning of the LVDS interface, the DS92UT16 has a built in BER  
test facility. The device may be configured to send a PRBS pattern in place of ATM cells. At the receiver, the  
device locks onto this PRBS pattern and provides an error metric.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
13  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
CPU INTERFACE  
The DS92UT16 contains a flexible microprocessor port capable of interfacing to any common system processor.  
Via this port, the system software can customize the behavior of the device from the various options provided,  
monitor the system performance, and activate diagnostic facilities such as loop-backs and LVDS BER testing.  
In addition to an 8-bit address and 8-bit data bus plus the associated bus protocol control signals, the port  
includes an open-drain interrupt signal. The device may assert this signal on the detection of various alarms  
within the device, such as excessive HEC errors, ECC buffer full/empty, loss of lock etc. Any of the potential  
internal sources of this interrupt may be inhibited individually via an interrupt mask.  
A software lock mechanism is implemented to prevent spurious modification of some of the DS92UT16 software  
accessible registers. A predefined UNLOCK write sequence is necessary to allow unrestricted software write  
access to the DS92UT16. A corresponding LOCK write sequence will prevent any software write access to the  
these registers. Read access is unrestricted except as noted in the next paragraph. See Table 9 for the LOCK  
and UNLOCK sequences. Only device configuration registers such as PDU cell length, UTOPIA interface mode,  
etc. are protected in this way. All other registers associated with the ECC, performance monitoring and interrupts  
are always write accessible by the software except as noted in next paragraph. See SOFTWARE LOCK—0x00  
to 0x01 SLK0 to SLK1.  
Table 9. Software Lock Sequences  
Meaning  
Sequence  
1st write  
2nd write  
1st write  
2nd write  
Address  
0x00  
Data  
0x00  
0xFF  
0xDE  
0xAD  
Unlock Sequence  
0x01  
LOCK Sequence  
0x00  
0x01  
Powering down a Receive Port inhibits access to the associated registers. This feature saves power when a  
Receive Port is not in use. It allows re-reading the last value read from a register associated with that Receive  
Port and disallows writing to registers. Receive Port A (RxA) in Power-down mode inhibits access to registers  
described in RECEIVE PORT A LINK LABEL—0x20 RALL to RECEIVE PORT A BIT ERROR COUNT—0x43 to  
0x45 RABEC2 to RABEC0. Receive Port B (RxB) in Power-down mode inhibits access to registers described in  
RECEIVE PORT B LINK LABEL—0x60 RBLL to RECEIVE PORT B BIT ERROR COUNT—0x83 to 0x85  
RBBEC2 to RBBEC0. The contents of these registers are not lost or altered in Power-down mode.  
PERFORMANCE MONITORING AND ALARMS  
The DS92UT16 provides a number of performance metrics and alarms to assist in equipment/network  
management. The programmer can independently enable or disable these alarms to raise an interrupt. See  
Performance Monitoring for a detailed description of the Performance Monitoring and General Alarms.  
TEST INTERFACE  
The IEEE 1149.1 JTAG [4.] port on the device provides access to the built-in test features such as boundary  
SCAN, Internal SCAN and RAM BIST. It may be used to test the device individually or as part of a more  
comprehensive circuit board or system test. (NOTE: The internal SCAN and RAM BIST functions are not  
intended for user access. Therefore, the device user should never assert the Test_se pin.)  
14  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
LOOPBACKS  
To assist in diagnostic testing, the device provides both LVDS interface loopbacks and ATM cell loopbacks. The  
former is suitable for designer or commission testing when the device is not passing live traffic. The latter allows  
cell trace testing on live traffic. The ATM cell loopback operates by recognizing the user-defined cell header of  
the special loopback cells. The available loopback options are shown in Table 10.  
In addition to providing a live round trip test via the cell loopbacks, the DS92UT16 helps pinpoint failures  
between transmit and receive paths by counting the number of loopback cells received.  
All loopbacks are programmable via the microprocessor interface.  
Table 10. Loopback Options  
LineLB_LVDS  
LocalLB_LVDS  
Physical loopback at the LVDS interface. Loop entering LVDS traffic back out of the  
device.  
Physical loopback at the LVDS interface. Loop exiting LVDS traffic back into the  
device.  
Up2Down_ATM  
Down2Up_ATM  
ATM loopback. Route defined cell entering the device at the LVDS interface back out.  
ATM loopback. Route defined cell entering the device at the UTOPIA interface back  
out.  
Figure 7. LVDS Interface and ATM Cell Loopback Options  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
15  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
 
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
Signal Description  
Package ball assignment in Package  
PIN DESCRIPTION  
Internal  
Bias  
Signal Name  
Description  
Width  
Signal Type  
Polarity  
UTOPIA INTERFACE  
U_TxData [15:0]  
U_TxParity  
Transmit toward the PHY Layer data bus.  
Transmit data bus parity bit. (odd parity)  
Transmit cell available - Extended.  
Transmit cell available - Normal/Extended.  
Enable Data transfers - Extended.  
16  
1
BiDir(1)  
BiDir(1)  
Input(2)  
BiDir(3)  
Output(2)  
BiDir(1)  
BiDir(1)  
BiDir(1)  
BiDir(3)  
BiDir(3)  
Input(2)  
BiDir(3)  
Output(2)  
BiDir(1)  
BiDir(3)  
BiDir(1)  
Input(4)  
Input(5)  
U_TxCLAV [7:1]  
U_TxCLAV [0]  
U_TxENB [7:1]  
U_TxENB [0]  
U_TxSOC  
7
Active High  
Active High  
Active Low  
Active Low  
Active High  
Pull Down  
Pull Down  
1
7
Enable Data transfers - Normal/Extended.  
Transmit Start Of Cell.  
1
1
U_TxAddr [4:0]  
U_RxData [15:0]  
U_RxParity  
Address of MPHY device being selected.  
Receive from the PHY Layer data bus.  
Receive data bus parity bit. (odd parity)  
Receive cell available - Extended.  
5
16  
1
U_RxCLAV [7:1]  
U_RxCLAV [0]  
U_RxENB [7:1]  
U_RxENB [0]  
U_RxSOC  
7
Active High  
Active High  
Active Low  
Active Low  
Active High  
Pull Down  
Pull Down  
Receive cell available - Normal/Extended.  
Enable Data transfers - Extended.  
1
7
Enable Data transfers - Normal/Extended.  
Receive Start Of Cell.  
1
1
U_RxAddr [4:0]  
U_UDBClk  
Address of MPHY device being selected.  
UTOPIA Down Bridge - Input transfer clock.  
UTOPIA Up Bridge - Output transfer clock.  
5
1
U_UUBClk  
1
LVDS INTERFACE  
LVDS_ADout[+,]  
LVDS_BDout[+,]  
LVDS_ADenb  
LVDS_BDenb  
LVDS_Synch  
A Serial data differential outputs.  
B Serial data differential outputs.  
Serial transmit data A output enable.  
Serial transmit data B output enable.  
2
2
1
1
1
Output  
Output  
Input  
Active High  
Active High  
Active High  
Pull Up  
Input  
Pull Up  
External control to transmit SYNCH patterns on serial  
interface.  
Input  
Pull Down  
LVDS_TxClk  
Transmit clock.  
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
Input  
Input  
LVDS_TxPwdn  
LVDS_ADin[+,]  
LVDS_ALock_n  
LVDS_ARxClk  
LVDS_ARefClk  
LVDS_APwdn  
LVDS_BDin[+,]  
LVDS_Block_n  
LVDS_BRxClk  
LVDS_BRefClk  
LVDS_BPwdn  
Transmit section power down  
PortA Serial data differential inputs.  
PortA Clock recovery lock status  
PortA Recovered clock.  
Active Low  
Active Low  
Active Low  
Pull Up  
Pull Up  
Pull Up  
Input  
Output  
Output  
Input  
PortA Reference clock for receive PLLs.  
PortA Power Down.  
Input  
PortB Serial data differential inputs.  
PortB Clock recovery lock status.  
PortB Recovered clock.  
Input  
Output  
Output  
Input  
PortB Reference clock for receive PLLs.  
PortB Power Down.  
Input  
(1) These pins are Outputs in ATM Layer mode and Inputs PHY Layer mode.  
(2) These pins are only used in PHY layer mode, Extended 248 PHY mode. In Normal 31 PHY mode or ATM layer mode, they must be  
unconnected.  
(3) These pins are Inputs in ATM Layer mode and Outputs PHY Layer mode  
(4) In PHY layer mode this is the Utopia TxClk and in ATM layer mode this is the Utopia RxClk.  
(5) In PHY layer mode this is the Utopia RxClk and in ATM layer mode this is the Utopia TxClk.  
16  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
PIN DESCRIPTION (continued)  
Internal  
Bias  
Signal Name  
CPU & GENERAL CONTROL  
Description  
Width  
Signal Type  
Polarity  
CPU_cs  
Select signal used to validate the address bus for  
read and write data transfers.  
1
Input  
Active Low  
Active Low  
CPU_rd (CPU_ds)  
CPU_wr (CPU_rnw)  
Read or Data Strobe, depending on CPU_BusMode.  
Write or Read/Write, depending on CPU_BusMode.  
1
1
Input  
Input  
Active Low  
(Write)  
CPU_int  
Interrupt request line.  
1
8
8
1
4
1
Output  
BiDir  
Input  
Input  
BiDir  
Input  
Active Low  
Open Drain  
CPU_Data[7:0]  
CPU_Addr[7:0]  
CPU_BusMode  
GPIO [3:0]  
Data bus.  
Address bus.  
Mode select for bus protocol.  
General Purpose Input/Output.  
Reset min pulse is 2X slowest clock period.  
Pull Down  
Pull Up  
Reset_n  
Active Low  
Active Low  
JTAG TEST INTERFACE  
JTAG_CLK  
Test clock.  
1
1
1
1
1
1
Input  
Input  
Input  
Input  
Output  
Input  
JTAG_Reset  
JTAG_TMS  
Test circuit reset.  
Pull Up  
Pull Up  
Test Mode Select.  
Test Data In.  
JTAG_TDI  
JTAG_TDO  
Test Data Out.  
Test_se  
SCAN enable (for manufacturing test only)  
Active High  
Pull Down  
TOTAL PIN COUNT  
Total Functional I/O  
LVDS VDD/VSS  
CVDD/CVSS  
133  
3.3V LVDS power for analog and digital  
2.5V Core Power for digital functions  
3.3V I/O power ring  
46  
6
IOVDD/IOVSS  
Total Power  
8
60  
3
No Connect  
No signal connected to this pin  
Total Pins  
196 LBGA, 15x15 mm, 1.0 mm ball pitch  
196  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
17  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
UTOPIA Interface Operation  
This section describes the operation of the UTOPIA Interface of the DS92UT16. The UTOPIA interface mode of  
operation is defined in the UTOPIA Configuration (UCFG) register described in UTOPIA  
CONFIGURATION—0xA0 UCFG. The format of the PDU cells carried over this interface is defined in the PDU  
Configuration (PDUCFG) register described in PDU CONFIGURATION—0x05 PDUCFG.  
The interface can operate in ATM layer mode or PHY layer mode. When operating as a Level 2 ATM layer  
interface, the protocol can be extended to cope with up to 248 PHY ports rather than the maximum 31 allowed  
by the standard Level 2 definition. This Extended Level 2 mode is achieved with eight CLAV and eight ENB  
signals.  
On power up the device defaults to ATM layer mode. To prevent potential contention on the Utopia interface  
signals, all the Utopia pins which are bidirectional are configured as outputs in tri-state mode and the Utopia  
interface block is disabled. The user must select the device operating mode, ATM layer or PHY layer, by writing  
the appropriate value to the UMODE bit of the UCFG register before enabling the Utopia interface block and  
releasing the Utopia interface pins. Enabling the Utopia interface and releasing the Utopia pins is achieved by  
setting the UBDEN bit of the UCFG register.  
UTOPIA BASIC LEVEL 2 MODE - 31 PORTS (Default Mode)  
In UTOPIA Level 2 mode:  
8-bit or 16-bit data buses are controlled by the BWIDTH bit of the UCFG register. In 8-bit mode only  
U_TxData[7:0] and U_RxData[7:0] are valid; parity is calculated and checked only over these bits of the data  
buses and the upper bits of the data buses are not used. In 16-bit mode of the full U_TxData[15:0] and  
U_RxData[15:0] are valid and parity is calculated over all bits of the data buses.  
One ATM Layer can communicate with up to 31 PHY ports using the MPhy address busses U_TxAddr[4:0]  
and U_RxAddr[4:0] and the control signals U_TxCLAV[0], U_RxCLAV[0], U_TxENB[0] and U_RxENB[0].  
U_TxCLAV[7:1], U_RxCLAV[7:1], U_TxENB[7:1] and U_RxENB[7:1] are not used.  
All Queues from 30 to 0 of the MTB may be used. There is one queue for each MPhy address so the use of  
the queues will depend on the connected ports list defined by the UCPL3–UCPL0 registers.  
Uses the connected ports list defined by the UCPL3-UCPL0 registers. In ATM mode, these registers are used  
to determine the ports that should be polled. In PHY mode, these registers are used to determine which  
MPhy addresses the device should respond to during polling.  
The connected sub-port list defined in the UCSPL register is not used.  
The sub-port address location defined by USPAL and USPAM registers is not used.  
The CLAV mode bits CLVM[1:0] of the UCFG register should be defined as CLVM[1:0] = 00.  
18  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
The configuration of the inputs/outputs of the UTOPIA Level 2 interface for ATM Layer mode and PHY Layer  
mode is shown in Figure 8. The main difference is that in ATM mode the CLAV pins are inputs and the MPhy  
Address and ENB pins are outputs; whereas in PHY mode, the CLAV pins are outputs and the MPhy Address  
and ENB pins are inputs.  
Note that in ATM Layer mode the DS92UT16 does not generate the UTOPIA clocks and must be supplied with  
these clocks just as in PHY mode.  
Figure 8. Basic UTOPIA Level 2 UMODE Configuration  
ATM Polling  
When configured as an ATM Layer device, the DS92UT16 polls the connected PHY ports using the MPhy  
address busses U_TxAddr and U_RxAddr. Only those ports which are connected will be polled. The connected  
ports list defined in the UCPL3–UCPL0 registers is used to determine which ports are connected. The PHY ports  
respond only on U_TxCLAV[0] and U_RxCLAV[0]. On reset the UCPL3–UCPL0 registers are all set to 0xFF so  
the DS92UT16 will poll all ports.  
PHY Polling  
When configured as a PHY Layer device the DS92UT16 is polled by the connected ATM device. During polling  
the DS92UT16 will only respond to MPhy addresses, on U_TxAddr and U_RxAddr, which are defined as  
connected. The connected ports list defined in the UCPL3–UCPL0 registers is used to determine which ports are  
connected. On reset the UCPL3–UCPL0 registers are all set to 0xFF so the DS92UT16 will respond to all MPhy  
addresses during polling. The DS92UT16 responds only on U_TxCLAV[0] and U_RxCLAV[0].  
NOTE  
There must always be at least one connected port defined in the UCPL3–UCPL0  
registers. If no ports are to be connected then use Configuration Traffic Inhibit mode  
described in Configuration and Traffic Inhibit Operation.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
19  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
UTOPIA EXTENDED LEVEL 2 MODE - 248 PORTS  
In UTOPIA Extended Level 2 mode:  
8-bit or 16-bit data buses are controlled by the BWIDTH bit of the UCFG register. In 8-bit mode, only  
U_TxData[7:0] and U_RxData[7:0] are valid; parity is calculated and checked only over these bits of the data  
buses. In 16-bit mode, the full U_TxData[15:0] and U_RxData[15:0] are valid; parity is calculated and checked  
over all bits of the data buses.  
In ATM mode, the DS92UT16 can communicate with up to 248 PHY ports using the MPhy address busses  
U_TxAddr[4:0] and U_RxAddr[4:0], and the control signals U_TxCLAV[7:0], U_RxCLAV[7:0], U_TxENB[7:0]  
and U_RxENB[7:0]. In PHY mode, the DS92UT16 behaves as a standard Level 2 device and only 31 ports  
are needed using the MPhy address busses U_TxAddr[4:0] and U_RxAddr[4:0], and the control signals  
U_TxCLAV[0], U_RxCLAV[0], U_TxENB[0] and U_RxENB[0].  
All Queues from 30 to 0 of the MTB may be used. There is one queue for each MPhy address so the use of  
the queues will depend on the connected ports list defined by the UCPL3–UCPL0 registers.  
The connected ports list defined by the UCPL3–UCPL0 registers and the connected sub-port list defined in  
the UCSPL register are used. In ATM mode, these registers are used to determine which ports should be  
polled. In PHY mode, these registers are used to determine which MPhy addresses the device should  
respond to during polling.  
The sub-port address location defined by USPAL and USPAM registers is used in ATM mode to determine  
the location of the 3-bit sub-port address in the PDU cell. In PHY mode these registers are not used.  
The CLAV mode bits CLVM[1:0] of the UCFG register should be defined as CLVM[1:0] = 11.  
The configuration of the inputs/outputs of the UTOPIA Level 2 interface for ATM Layer mode and PHY Layer  
mode is shown in Figure 9.  
Figure 9. Extended UTOPIA Level 2 UMODE Configuration  
The main difference is that in ATM mode the CLAV pins are inputs and the MPhy Address and ENB pins are  
outputs, whereas in PHY mode the CLAV pins are outputs and the MPhy Address and ENB pins are inputs. Also,  
in ATM mode all eight CLAV and ENB pins are used, but in PHY mode only one of the CLAV and ENB pins are  
used.  
Note that in ATM Layer mode the DS92UT16 does not generate the UTOPIA clocks but must be supplied with  
these clocks just as in PHY mode.  
20  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
ATM Polling  
When configured as an ATM Layer device, the DS92UT16 polls the connected PHY ports using the MPhy  
address busses U_TxAddr and U_RxAddr. Only those ports which are connected will be polled. The connected  
ports list defined in the UCPL3–UCPL0 registers is used to determine which ports are connected. The PHY ports  
respond on U_TxCLAV[7:0] and U_RxCLAV[7:0]. The MPhy address determines the Port and the CLAV pin  
number determines the sub-port. Therefore up to 8 sub-ports may be connected to a port. Polling of a single  
MPhy address will get eight responses on the eight CLAV lines. The DS92UT16 uses the connected sub-port list  
defined in the UCSPL register to determine which of these eight sub-port responses are valid. On reset, the  
UCPL3–UCPL0 registers are all set to 0xFF and the UCSPL register is set to 0x01, so the DS92UT16 will poll all  
ports and assume only sub-port zero is connected.  
PHY Polling  
When configured as a PHY Layer device, the DS92UT16 is polled by the connected ATM device. During polling,  
the DS92UT16 will only respond to MPhy addresses on U_TxAddr and U_RxAddr, which are defined as  
connected. The connected ports list defined in the UCPL3–UCPL0 registers is used to determine which ports are  
connected. On reset the UCPL3–UCPL0 registers are all set to 0xFF so the DS92UT16 will respond to all MPhy  
addresses during polling.  
NOTE  
There must always be at least one connected port defined in the UCPL3–UCPL0  
registers. If no ports are to be connected then use Configuration Traffic Inhibit mode  
described in Configuration and Traffic Inhibit Operation.  
Sub-Port Address  
The operation of the sub-port address is illustrated in Figure 10. To use the Extended Level 2 mode that allows  
addressing up to 248 Ports, the ATM Layer (that which drives the DS92UT16 in PHY mode) must be capable of  
inserting a three bit sub-port address in the PDU cell for use by the DS92UT16. This 3-bit sub-port address must  
reside in either the User Prepend, Cell Header, or UDF bytes. It’s location is defined in the UTOPIA Sub-Port  
Address Location (USPAL) and UTOPIA Sub-Port Address Mask (USPAM) registers. The USPAL register  
defines which byte of the User Prepend, Cell Header, or UDF, contains the address and the USPAM register  
defines which three bits of that byte are the sub-port address.  
Transmit Path Example: The MPhy address is interpreted as the Port address. So, a cell destined for the PHY  
designated as Port 0 Sub-Port 7 has the three bit sub-port address 7 (binary “111”) inserted into the defined sub-  
port address location of the PDU cell by the ATM layer head-end. It is then transmitted to the DS92UT16 in PHY  
mode using MPhy address 0. The DS92UT16 in PHY mode does not examine the sub-port address because all  
cells are transmitted down-bridge anyway.  
At the far end, the DS92UT16 in ATM mode extracts the sub-port address. This is used to determine which sub-  
port CLAV/ENB signals the destination PHY is connected to. A port address of 0 and a sub-port address of 7  
means that the destination PHY is MPhy address 0 attached to U_TxENB[7] and U_TxCLAV[7]. The cell is then  
transmitted to that PHY.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
21  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
Figure 10. Sub-Port Address Operation  
Receive Path Example: The DS92UT16 in ATM mode receives a cell from the PHY with MPhy address 0  
attached to U_RxENB[6] and U_RxCLAV[6] and designates it as from Port 0 Sub-Port 6. The DS92UT16 inserts  
the sub-port address 6 (binary “110”) into the sub-port address location of the received PDU. Then this PDU is  
transmitted to the head-end. The head-end ATM layer device must extract this sub-port address from the PDU to  
determine the full address of the originating PHY.  
22  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
Connected Port and Sub-Port Lists  
Figure 11 illustrates the usage of the connected port list registers (UCPL3–UCPL0) and the connected sub-port  
list register (UCSPL). In this case, the DS92UT16 in ATM mode defines Port 1 and Sub-port 7 as not connected.  
The UCPL3–UCPL0 registers contain 31 bits corresponding to the 31 possible Ports addressed by the MPhy  
address busses. If a bit location in the UCPL3–UCPL0 registers is set, then that Port is connected. The sub-ports  
of the connected Port are defined by the UCSPL register. If a bit location in the UCSPL register is set, then that  
sub-port is connected.  
In Figure 11, the registers are set as follows: UCPL3 = UCPL2 = UCPL1 = 0xF, UCPL0 = 0xFD, and UCSPL =  
0xEF.  
With bit 1 of UCPL0 cleared, then Port 1 is not connected. This means that none of the eight sub-ports of Port 1  
are connected. So Port 1 Sub-port 7, Port 1 Sub-port 6, Port 1 Sub-port 5, Port 1 Sub-port 4, Port 1 Sub-port 3,  
Port 1 Sub-port 2, Port 1 Sub-port 1, and Port 1 Sub-port 0 are not connected. Port 1 will therefore, not be polled.  
With bit 7 of UCSPL cleared, then sub-port 7 is not connected. This means that sub-port 7 for all possible 31  
ports is not connected. So Port 31 Sub-port 7, Port 30 Sub-port 7, Port 29 Sub-port 7,......and Port 0 Sub-port 7  
are not connected.  
Therefore, clearing a bit in the UCPL3–UCPL0 registers will disconnect 8 possible PHY port locations and  
clearing a bit in the UCSPL register will disconnect 31 possible PHY port locations.  
Figure 11. Connected Port and Connected Sub-Port Usage  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
23  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
MTB Queue Configuration  
www.ti.com  
SINGLE BRIDGE MTB CONFIGURATION  
The Multi-port Traffic Buffer is a 160 cell linked-list buffer that is shared across as many as 31 Port queues.  
There is a single queue per MPHY address.  
In the up-bridge direction, a per queue flow control protocol (described in Flow Control) prevents queue overflow.  
Each Port has a programmable upper fill threshold. Should any queue reach this upper threshold, back-pressure  
is applied over the serial link, via the flow control mechanism, to the far end (transmitting) device. The  
transmitting device uses the normal UTOPIA flow control handshaking to prevent any more cells being  
transferred to that MPHY and thus prevents overflow.  
With link-list buffers, each queue may be over-assigned memory space, working on the assumption that not  
every queue will back up simultaneously. To accommodate the rare occasions where the buffer as a whole  
approaches full but individual queues are below their full threshold, the device also compares the overall buffer  
fill against a threshold. Should the overall buffer approach overflow, the flow control mechanism provides a global  
‘halt’ command to ensure that no cells will be lost.  
The MTB Queue Threshold, MTBQT30–MTBQT0 registers define the maximum size in PDU cells of each of the  
31 queues. If all 31 queues are being used it is recommended that the threshold be left at the default of 4 cells. If  
less than 31 queues are in use then the queue thresholds may be raised if required. The recommended  
maximum queue thresholds are given in Table 11. These are recommended maximum thresholds only.  
It is further recommended that any queue that is not being used is set with a threshold of zero. When a queue  
has reached its programmed threshold the device flow control mechanism will prevent the far end device from  
accepting cells for that MPHY address. Therefore, by setting the threshold of an unused queue to zero, it  
prevents the UTOPIA interface of the far end device from accepting cells for that MPHY address by either, not  
asserting the CLAV for that MPHY address when in PHY Mode, or not selecting that MPHY address when in  
ATM mode.  
Also, note that setting  
a threshold of zero will cause the corresponding Queue Full bit in the  
MTBQFL3–MTBQFL0 registers to be continuously set for that queue.  
Table 11. Recommended Maximum MTB Queue Thresholds  
Number of  
Queues in Use  
Recommended  
Threshold  
Number of  
Queues in Use  
Recommended  
Threshold  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
4
4
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
15  
16  
5
18  
5
20  
5
23  
6
26  
6
29  
7
8
34  
7
7
39  
8
6
47  
9
5
58  
10  
10  
11  
12  
4
4
74  
3
100  
100  
154  
2
1
24  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
MULTIPLE BRIDGE MTB CONFIGURATION  
When UTOPIA-LVDS bridges are used in parallel as in Figure 5 the PHY mode DS92UT16s will forward all cells  
on the UTOPIA TxData bus across the LVDS bridge. Cells that are not addressed for PHYs on a bridge will  
accumulate in the MTBs of the ATM mode DS92UT16s. If too many cells accumulate the MTB will become full  
and traffic will be stopped over that bridge. To prevent filling the MTBs PHY port addresses must be distributed  
evenly across all bridges in the system. Additionally, the MTB queue threshold of any ports not in the Connected  
Ports List should be set to 0 in order to limit the number of cells that can accumulate.  
Table 12 lists the minimum number of ports that must be assigned to each bridge for the total number of ports in  
the system.  
Table 12. Minimum Ports per  
Bridge in a Mult-Bridge  
System  
Total Ports Used  
Minimum  
Number of  
Ports per  
Bridge  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Configuration and Traffic Inhibit Operation  
Modifying some device configuration settings should not be carried out while traffic is flowing. A mechanism to  
inhibit traffic is provided, which should be used when changing any of the settings contained in the PDUCFG,  
UCFG, USPAL or USPAM registers.  
The Traffic Inhibit mechanism causes traffic to stop. The UTOPIA interface will stop transmitting and receiving  
cells, the LVDS transmit section will transmit Idle cells, and the incoming cells on the active LVDS receive port  
will be discarded. It is controlled by the Configuration Traffic Inhibit (CTI) and Traffic Inhibit Status (TIS) bits of  
the General Control and Status (GCS) register, see GENERAL CONTROL AND STATUS—0x03 GCS.  
The processor should set the CTI bit before changing any of the PDUCFG, UCFG, USPAL or USPAM register  
settings. This will initiate the Traffic Inhibit mechanism. The TIS bit should then be polled. When the TIS bit is set,  
then traffic is inhibited.  
The MTB and FIB queues MUST be flushed at this stage. Use the FIBFL and MTBFL bits of the QFL register  
described in QUEUE FLUSH—0xD8 QFL to accomplish the queue flushing. Set these bits to flush the queues  
and then poll these bits to determine when flushed. The queue flushing is complete when these bits are clear.  
The device can now be reconfigured safely. When configuration is completed, then the CTI bit can be cleared by  
the processor and normal operation resumed.  
NOTE  
The CTI bit is set on either power up or software reset (see GENERAL CONTROL AND  
STATUS—0x03 GCS) and therefore the Traffic Inhibit mechanism is active. When  
initialization of the device registers is completed by the processor the CTI bit should be  
cleared.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
25  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
NOTE  
The devices at both ends of the LVDS link must be configured with the same values for  
the PDUCFG, USPAL, and USPAM registers for correct operation.  
NOTE  
When configuration of both ends of the link is complete then CTI must not be disabled for  
at least two PDU transport times (i.e. the length of time it takes to transport two PDUs  
over the LVDS link). This “CTI disable hold-off period” allows all PDUs of the old  
configuration to be received and discarded correctly. If this hold-off period is not respected  
then an idle cell PDU of the old PDU configuration may arrive at a device programmed  
with the new PDU configuration and incorrectly be interpreted as a valid cell.  
NOTE  
Any change in the PDU configuration which changes the byte location of the TC HEC byte  
will cause the far end device to fall out of TC delineation. See Figure 6.  
Cell/Frame Delineation and Descrambler Operation  
Each of the two Transmission Convergence Sub-Layer (TCS) DisAssemblers receives 16-bit data from the  
associated LVDS receive section. The TCS DisAssembler must first find the Transport Container (TC)  
boundaries, then the data can be descrambled and the Frame boundaries found. Once this has been achieved  
the received data can be disassembled.  
After achieving TC delineation and the Descrambler locking, then the cell data within each TC is valid and can be  
passed to the MTB. If TC delineation is lost, or the Descrambler is not locked, then cell data is invalid and is not  
passed to the MTB.  
Frame delineation must be achieved before the bytes of the F Channel are considered valid. The F Channel  
consists of the ECC, Flow Control, BIP, Remote Alarm and Signaling and Link Label bytes (see F Channel Byte  
Usage Within the Frame). If Frame delineation is lost then  
the received ECC bytes are considered invalid and are assumed to retain the last valid values received  
the Flow Control bytes are considered invalid and are assumed to be all ones, i.e. ‘halt’ all ports  
the Remote Alarm and Signaling byte is considered invalid and is assumed to retain the last valid value  
received  
and the Link Label byte is considered invalid and is assumed to retain the last valid value received.  
TC and Frame delineation is achieved using the HEC bytes of the TC’s. The HEC bytes are not scrambled.  
The Descrambler is loaded with the Scrambler sequence on start-up to achieve lock. The operation of these  
blocks is described below.  
26  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
TRANSPORT CONTAINER DELINEATION  
At the receive end of the LVDS link, the data will appear as a stream with no indication of Transport Container  
(TC) or frame boundaries. TC delineation is achieved by finding correct HEC’s on the incoming data stream. The  
TC delineation state diagram is shown in Figure 12.  
Figure 12. State Diagram for TC Delineation  
C_HUNT—On reset, the TC delineation state machine starts in the C_HUNT state and TC delineation has not  
been achieved. In the C_HUNT state, a HEC is calculated word by word on a data stream equal in length to the  
TC Header and compared against the next received byte. The length of the TC header is derived from the  
PDUCFG register (see PDU CONFIGURATION—0x05 PDUCFG). This process is repeated until a correct HEC  
is detected. When a single correct HEC has been detected the state machine moves into the C_PRESYNC state.  
Note that depending on the length of the TC and the length of the TC Header it may be necessary to word slip  
after a predefined number of HEC calculations in order to obtain a correct HEC.  
C_PRESYNC—In C_PRESYNC, if a correct HEC is found DELTA consecutive times then the state machine  
moves to the C_SYNC state and the system has achieved TC delineation. If an erred HEC is detected during the  
C_PRESYNC state, the process moves back to the C_HUNT state.  
C_SYNC—In the C_SYNC state, TC delineation is assumed to be lost if an erred HEC is obtained on ALPHA  
consecutive occasions. The state machine will move back to the C_HUNT state.  
The values of DELTA and ALPHA are programmable independently for Port A and Port B. They are contained in  
the RACDT and RBCDT registers (see RECEIVE PORT A CELL DELINEATION THRESHOLDS—0x40 RACDT  
and RECEIVE PORT B CELL DELINEATION THRESHOLDS—0x80 RBCDT). On reset, DELTA = 8 and ALPHA  
= 7.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
27  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
FRAME DELINEATION  
Once the system has achieved TC delineation, the Frame delineation process can begin. The Frame delineation  
process is achieved by checking for correct HEC’s with the added coset x6 + x4 + x2 + 1. This added coset  
differentiates ‘Start of Frame’ TC HEC’s from normal TC HEC’s. Only the HEC of TC0 has this added coset.  
This is the standard coset which may be added to all HEC’s (CDIS bit in the LKSC register in LINK STATUS  
AND CONTROL—0x08 LKSC). If the coset is already added to all HEC’s, then it is added again to the HEC of  
TC0. This ensures that the HEC of TC0 can always be differentiated from that of other TC’s.  
The Frame delineation state diagram is shown in Figure 13.  
Figure 13. State Diagram for Frame Delineation  
F_HUNT—On reset, the Frame delineation state machine starts in the F_HUNT state and Frame delineation has  
not been achieved. Each received HEC is monitored to determine if it has the added coset and is therefore the  
Start Of Frame (SOF) HEC. When a single correct SOF HEC is detected, the state machine enters the  
F_PRESYNC state.  
F_PRESYNC—In the F_PRESYNC state if a correct SOF HEC is found SIGMA consecutive times the state  
machine moves to the F_SYNC state and the system is said to have achieved Frame delineation. If an errored  
SOF HEC is detected during the F_PRESYNC state the state machine moves back to the F_HUNT state.  
F_SYNC—In the F_SYNC state, Frame delineation will be assumed to be lost if an erred SOF HEC is obtained  
on MU consecutive occasions. The state machine will move back to the F_HUNT state.  
The values of SIGMA and MU are programmable independently for Port A and Port B. They are contained in the  
RAFDT and RBFDT registers (see RECEIVE PORT A FRAME DELINEATION THRESHOLDS—0x41 RAFDT  
and  
RECEIVE  
PORT  
B
FRAME  
DELINEATION  
THRESHOLDS—0x81  
RBFDT).  
On reset, SIGMA = 8 and MU = 7.  
28  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
DESCRAMBLER OPERATION  
Once TC delineation has been obtained, the Descrambler synchronization can begin.  
After reset, the Descrambler expects the far-end transmitting device to send it’s Scrambler sequence embedded  
in Idle cells so that the Descrambler can synchronize (lock) to it. This scrambler-sequence transfer is achieved by  
means of the Remote Descrambler Loss of Lock bit (RDSLL) in the Remote Alarm and Signaling byte (see  
Remote Alarm and Signaling Byte). This received bit is stored as the RARDSLL bit of the RARA register for Port  
A (see RECEIVE PORT A REMOTE STATUS AND ALARMS—0x3C RARA) and the RBRDSLL bit of the RBRA  
register for Port B (see RECEIVE PORT B REMOTE STATUS AND ALARMS—0x7C RBRA).  
The lock status of the Descrambler is transmitted to the far-end device as the RDSLL bit. If the Descrambler is  
out of lock, then the transmitted RDSLL = 1. At the far end device, this is stored as RARDSLL or RBRDSLL,  
depending on which port it is connected to. When this bit is set for the active receive port, it causes the TCS  
Assembler to transmit the Scrambler sequence embedded in Idle cells. The Descrambler loads this sequence  
and attempts to lock to it. Once the Descrambler locks to this sequence, it clears the RDSLL bit transmitted to  
the far-end device, which causes the far-end device to stop sending the Scrambler sequence embedded in Idle  
cells and to begin sending real traffic cells.  
The Descrambler synchronization state diagram is shown in Figure 14.  
Figure 14. State Diagram for Descrambler Synchronization  
D_HUNT—On reset, the Descrambler synchronization state machine starts in the D_HUNT state and the  
Descrambler is not in Lock. When TC delineation has been achieved, the transmitted Scrambler sequence from  
the far-end device is loaded into the Descrambler. The state machine enters the D_PRESYNC state.  
D_PRESYNC—The received scrambler sequences and predicted sequences are compared for each TC. For  
each correct prediction, a confidence counter increments, and for each incorrect prediction, the confidence  
counter is decremented. When the confidence counter reaches RHO, then the state machine moves to the  
D_SYNCH state and the system is said to have achieved scrambler Lock. If the confidence counter reaches zero  
then the state machine moves back to the HUNT state.  
D_SYNC—The comparison of received scrambler sequences and predicted sequences is repeated for each  
Frame. For each correct prediction, a confidence counter is decremented, and for each incorrect prediction, the  
confidence counter is incremented. The confidence counter has a lower limit of zero. If the confidence counter  
reaches PSI, then the state machine moves back to the D_HUNT state and the Descrambler is out of Lock.  
The state machine will also return directly to D_HUNT if TC delineation is lost.  
The values of PSI and RHO are programmable independently for Port A and Port B. They are contained in the  
RADSLKT and RBDSLKT registers (see RECEIVE PORT A DESCRAMBLER LOCK THRESHOLDS—0x42  
RADSLKT and RECEIVE PORT B DESCRAMBLER LOCK THRESHOLDS—0x82 RBDSLKT). On reset PSI = 8  
and RHO = 8.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
29  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
ANALYZING LOCK AND SYNCHRONIZATION TIME  
After the DS92UT16 LVDS receiver’s PLL locks onto the incoming serial data stream and begins to recover data,  
it must achieve TC lock, then frame lock and descrambler lock before transferring cells. The number of cycles to  
complete this synchronization depends on the PDU length as well as the byte location in the TC and frame  
where the receiver begins synchronizing.  
Here are the assumptions for this example on calculating the synchronization time.  
PDU length = 64 bytes (maximum possible) = 32 cycles (16 bit data path)  
Max TC length =PDU + 4 bytes = 34 cycles  
Frame = 56 TC = 1904 cycles  
Once the LVDS Receive input PLL locks to the incoming serial data stream and recovers data bits, the  
DS92UT16 searches for a TC HEC byte. Assuming that the DS92UT16 just missed a HEC when the LVDS PHY  
locked, it will take a minimum of one TC to find the HEC byte. Next, the DS92UT16 will continue finding correct  
TC HECs until it matches the number in the confidence counter (default setting is DELTA = 8). The TC  
delineation is now in sync.  
Next, the UT16 will start looking for SOF HECs that indicate a start-of-frame. Assuming a SOF has just passed,  
the max time to find an SOF should be 1 Frame. Now the UT16 will collect frames until the correct number  
matches the confidence counter (default setting is SIGMA = 8). When the correct number of SOFs matches the  
confidence counter, the frame delineation is in sync.  
Simultaneous with the frame delineation, the DS92UT16 will synchronize and lock the descrambler. The lock  
procedure begins with the transmitting DS92UT16 sending the scrambler sequence in idle cells. It does this  
automatically on reset or start-up until it receives the cleared RDSLL bit in the Remote Alarm and Signaling byte.  
After TC delineation occurs at the receive end, the DS92UT16 will count correct scrambler sequence predictions  
until it matches the confidence counter (default setting is RHO = 8). When the correct number of scrambler  
sequence predictions matches the confidence counter, the descrambler is synchronized and the receiving  
DS92UT16 clears the RDSLL bit.  
In this example, the time it takes for a receiving DS92UT16 to synchronize to the transmitting DS92UT16, after  
the PLL locks, is approximately determined by the following calculation. This time will differ according to PDU  
length and the value programmed as the confidence thresholds.  
(1+8) TC = 9 (34 cycles) = 306 cycles for TC sync, and (1+8) (1 frame) = 9 (1904 cycles) = 17136 cycles. This is  
a total of 17442 cycles and assumes that the descrambler lock occurs during the 8 frames it takes for the frame  
delineation to occur.  
LVDS Interface Operation  
The LVDS interface combines a transmit serializer and two receive deserializers. The serializer accepts 16- bit  
data from the TCS Assembler block and transforms it into a serial data stream with embedded clock information.  
Each deserializer recovers the clock and data from the received serial data stream to deliver the resulting 16-bit  
wide words to the corresponding TCS DisAssembler block.  
The LVDS interface has a Transmit serializer block and two Receive deserializer blocks that can operate  
independent of each other. The transmit data is duplicated over two differential output pairs with independent tri-  
state controls. The transmit block has a power-down control. Each receiver has a power down control and the  
two output stages have independent tri-state control. These features enable efficient operation in various  
applications.  
The serializer and deserializer blocks each have three operating states. They are the Initialization, Data Transfer,  
and Resynchronization states. In addition, there are two passive states: Powerdown and TRI-STATE.  
The following sections describe each operating mode and passive state. For clarity these descriptions refer only  
to the receive Port A. The operation of receive Port B is the same.  
30  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
INITIALIZATION  
Before the DS92UT16 sends or receives data, it must initialize the links to and from another DS92UT16.  
Initialization refers to synchronizing the Serializer’s and the Deserializer’s PLL’s to local clocks. The local clocks  
must be the same frequency or within a specified range if from different sources. After the Serializers  
synchronize to the local clocks, the Deserializers synchronize to the Serializers as the second and final  
initialization step.  
Step 1: After applying VCC and GND to the Serializer and Deserializer, the LVDS transmit outputs are held in  
TRI-STATE and the on-chip power-sequencing circuitry disables the internal circuits. When VCC reaches VCCOK  
(2.2V) in each device, the PLL in the serializer and deserializer begins locking to the local clock. In the Serializer,  
the local clock is the LVDS_TxClk, while in the Port A Deserializer it is the reference clock, LVDS_ARefClk. A  
local on-board oscillator or other source provides the specified clock input to the LVDS_TxClk and  
LVDS_ARefClk pins.  
The Serializer outputs remain in TRI-STATE until the PLL locks to the LVDS_TxClk. After locking to  
LVDS_TxClk, the Serializer block is now ready to send data or synchronization patterns. If the LVDS_Synch pin  
is high, or the TXSYNC bit of the LVC register is set (see LVDS CONTROL—0x04 LVC), then the Serializer  
block generates and sends the synchronization patterns (sync-pattern).  
The internal Port A Deserializer data outputs remain invalid while the PLL locks to the reference clock.  
When the Port A Deserializers PLL locks to incoming data or sync-pattern on the LVDS_ADin pins, it will clear  
the corresponding Local Loss Of Signal bit, LLOSA, in the ETXRXA register (see ECC TRANSMIT BUFFER  
AND RECEIVE LVDS ALARMS—0x0A ETXRXA) and the lock pin LVDS_ALock_n will go low.  
Step 2: The Deserializer PLL must synchronize to the Serializer to complete the initialization. The Serializer that  
is generating the stream to the Deserializer must send random (non-repetitive) data patterns or sync-patterns  
during this step of the Initialization State. The Deserializer will lock onto sync-patterns within a specified amount  
of time. The lock to random data depends on the data patterns and, therefore, the lock time is unspecified.  
In order to lock to the incoming LVDS data stream, the Deserializer identifies the rising clock edge in a sync-  
pattern and will synchronize to the embedded clock in less than 5 µs. If the Deserializer is locking to a random  
data stream from the Serializer, then it performs a series of operations to identify the rising clock edge and locks  
to it. Because this locking procedure depends on the data pattern, it is not possible to specify how long it will  
take. At the point where the Port A Deserializer’s PLL locks to the embedded clock, the LVDS_ALock_n pin goes  
low, the LLOSA bit of the ETXRXA register may be cleared and valid data is presented to the TCS DisAssembler  
block. Note that the LVDS_ALock_n signal is synchronous to valid data being presented to the TCS  
DisAssembler.  
The user’s application determines whether sync-patterns or lock to random data is the preferred method for  
synchronization. If sync-patterns are preferred, the associated Port A deserializer’s LVDS_ALock_n pin is a  
convenient way to provide control of the LVDS_Synch pin, possibly via the RARLOSA (Receive Port A, Remote  
Loss Of Signal) bit of the RARA register, see RECEIVE PORT A REMOTE STATUS AND ALARMS—0x3C  
RARA.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
31  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
DATA TRANSFER  
After initialization, the Serializer is able to transfer data to the Deserializer. The serial data stream includes a start  
bit and stop bit appended by the serializer, which frame the sixteen data bits. The start bit is always high and the  
stop bit is always low. The start and stop bits also function as clock bits embedded in the serial stream.  
The Serializer block accepts 16-bit data from the TCS Assembler block. The internal version of the LVDS_TxClk  
signal latches the incoming data. If the LVDS_Synch input or the TXSYNC bit of the LVC register is high for 5  
LVDS_TxClk cycles, the Serializer does not latch data from the TCS Assembler block.  
The Serializer transmits the data and clock bits (16+2 bits) at 18 times the LVDS_TxClk frequency. For example,  
if LVDS_TxClk is 50 MHz, the serial rate is 50 X 18 = 900 Mbps. Since only 16 bits are from input data, the serial  
“payload’’ rate is 16 times the LVDS_TxClk frequency. For instance, if LVDS_TxClk = 50 MHz, the payload data  
rate is 50 X 16 = 800 Mbps. LVDS_TxClk is provided by the data source and must be in the range of 30 MHz to  
52 MHz.  
When the Port A Deserializer channel synchronizes to the input from a Serializer, it drives its LVDS_ALock_n pin  
low, the LLOSA bit of the ETXRXA register is cleared and valid data is delivered to the TCS DisAssembler. The  
process flow is that the Port A Deserializer locks to the embedded clock, uses it to generate multiple internal data  
strobes, and then drives the recovered clock on the LVDS_ARxClk pin. The LVDS_ARxClk is synchronous to the  
data delivered to the TCS DisAssembler. While the LVDS_ALock_n pin is low, data to the TCS DisAssembler is  
valid. Otherwise, the data is invalid and is ignored by the TCS DisAssembler and an interrupt may be raised on  
the LLOSA bit being set high.  
LVDS_ALock_n and LVDS_ARxClk signals will drive a minimum of three CMOS input gates, a 15 pF total load.  
The Port A Deserializer input pins LVDS_ADin are high impedance during Receiver Powerdown (LVDS_APwdn  
pin low or bit RAPWDN of the LVC register set high) and power-off (VCC = 0V).  
RESYNCHRONIZATION  
Whenever the Port A Deserializer loses lock, it will automatically try to resynchronize. For example, if the  
embedded clock edge is not detected two times in succession, the PLL loses lock and the LVDS_ALock_n pin  
and the LLOSA bit are driven high. The Port A Deserializer then enters the operating mode where it tries to lock  
to a random data stream. It looks for the embedded clock edge, identifies it and then proceeds through the  
synchronization process.  
The logic state of the LVDS_ALock_n pin indicates whether the data is valid; when it is low, the data is valid. The  
system must monitor the LVDS_ALock_n pin and LLOSA bit to determine whether received data is valid. The  
DS92UT16 facilitates this by allowing an interrupt to be raised on LLOSA being set. There is a short delay in  
response to the PLL losing synchronization to the incoming data stream.  
The user can choose to resynchronize to the random data stream or to force fast synchronization by pulsing the  
Serializer LVDS_Synch pin or setting the TXSYNC bit. This scheme is left up to the user discretion. One  
recommendation is to provide a feedback loop using the LVDS_ALock_n pin itself to control the sync request of  
the Serializer, which is the LVDS_Synch pin.  
32  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
POWERDOWN/TRI-STATE  
The Powerdown state is a very low power consuming sleep mode that the Serializer and Deserializer will occupy  
while waiting for initialization. You can also use the LVDS_ADenb, LVDS_BDenb, LVDS_TxPwdn, LVDS_APwdn  
and LVDS_BPwdn pins, or the TXPWDN, TXADEN, TXBDEN, RAPWDN and RBPWDN bits of the LVC register  
to reduce power when there are no pending data transfers. The Port A Deserializer enters Powerdown when  
LVDS_APwdn is driven low or the RAPWDN bit is set. In Powerdown, the PLL stops and the outputs go into TRI-  
STATE, which reduces supply current to the µA range.  
To bring the Port A Deserializer block out of the Powerdown state, the system drives LVDS_APwdn high and the  
RAPWDN bit is cleared. When the Deserializer exits Powerdown, it automatically enters the Initialization state.  
The system must then allow time for Initialization before data transfer can begin.  
The LVDS_TxPwdn driven low or the TXPWDN bit clear, forces the Serializer block into low power consumption  
where the supply current is in the µA range. The Serializer PLL stops and the output goes into a TRI-STATE  
condition.  
To bring the Serializer block out of the Powerdown state, the system drives LVDS_TxPwdn high and sets the  
TXPWDN bit. When the Serializer exits Powerdown, its PLL must lock to the LVDS_TxClk before it is ready for  
the Initialization state. The system must then allow time for Initialization before data transfer can begin.  
NOTE  
The associated reference clock must always be active for a change of state on the  
receiver powerdowns. That is LVDS_ARefClk for LVDS_APwdn and LVDS_BRefClk for  
LVDS_BPwdn must be active to have an effect.  
LOOPBACK TEST OPERATION  
The DS92UT16 includes two Loopback modes for testing the device functionality and the transmission line  
continuity. They are the Line Loopback and the Local Loopback modes.  
The Line Loopback connects the serial data input (LVDS_ADin or LVDS_BDin) to the serial data output  
(LVDS_ADout and LVDS_BDout). The input signal also routes to the parallel data input of the TCS  
DisAssembler. In the Line Loopback mode, the serial input stream goes through deserializer, passes to both the  
DisAssembler and the serializer inputs, and then is transmitted out onto the transmission line.  
The Local Loopback connects the serial data output from the serializer back to the serial data input of the  
deserializer. The connection route includes all the functional blocks of the DS92UT16 except for the LVDS serial  
output buffers and LVDS receiver input.  
The ALBC register controls the loopbacks with the LNEN, LNSEL, LCLA and LCLB bits.  
LOOP TIMING OPERATION  
The DS92UT16 includes a Loop Timing mode controlled by the LT bit of the GCS register, see GENERAL  
CONTROL AND STATUS—0x03 GCS. On reset the LT bit is clear so the LVDS transmit clock is sourced directly  
from the LVDS_TxClk pin. Setting the LT bit will switch the transmit clock to be sourced from the recovered clock  
of the active receiver, as defined by the LBA bit of the LKSC register, see LINK STATUS AND CONTROL—0x08  
LKSC. The LVDS transmit and TCA blocks will then be driven by this internal clock and not the LVDS_TxClk pin.  
Switching to or from Loop Timing mode will cause the transmitted scrambler sequence to change. This will cause  
the far end device to loose scrambler lock. However, it may take a number of frames for the far end device to  
register the lose of scrambler lock because of the setting of the confidence counter, see DESCRAMBLER  
OPERATION. The far end device will then relock to the new scrambler sequence and operation will resume as  
normal.  
Also, when operating in Loop Timing mode, then a Loss of Lock on the active LVDS receiver, or a switch of  
active receiver, will also cause the transmitted scrambler sequence to change. This again will cause the far end  
device to loose scrambler lock. The far end device will then relock to the new scrambler sequence and operation  
will resume as normal.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
33  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
NOTE  
From the time that the near end device is switched to or from Loop Timing mode, until the  
time that the far end device registers the loss of scrambler lock, all received data at the far  
end will be corrupted. This is because the scrambler lock works on a frame-by-frame basis  
and each frame is 56 transport containers long. For this reason switching to or from Loop  
Timing mode should not be carried out on live traffic.  
NOTE  
Both the input LVDS_TxClk clock and active port recovered clock must be present for the  
switch to complete successfully.  
NOTE  
On reset the device will operate from the LVDS_TxClk input pin clock and therefore this  
clock must be present to ensure correct operation.  
Switching Receive Ports  
The DS92UT16 has two independent receive sections designated Port A and Port B. Either port can receive  
ATM cell traffic, but only one at a time. The LBA bit of the LKSC register, described in LINK STATUS AND  
CONTROL—0x08 LKSC, controls this function.  
The ECC also has two independent receive sections. This is controlled by the settings of the ECCA and ECCB  
bits of the LKSC register. Either one or both ECC receive sections can be active. The selected ECC receive port  
is independent of the active traffic port selection. For example, you may select Port A as active for cell traffic by  
clearing the LBA bit, and select the ECC to be receiving on Port B by setting the ECCB bit. The ECC can  
communicate over either link without affecting the active cell traffic port because the ECC does not use any of  
the transport container designated for ATM cells.  
Selecting the active traffic receive port is accomplished by simply changing the value of the LBA bit. When set  
high, Port B accepts the traffic cells, and when cleared to low, Port A accepts the traffic cells. After changing the  
LBA value, the MTB will complete receiving the current cell before switching to the new receive Port. The MTB  
then waits for the next Start of Cell indication from the associated TCS DisAssembler. This means that the MTB  
does not need to be flushed or reset because of a change in the active traffic receive Port.  
Switching from one port to another completes in a maximum of 6 clock cycles. However, this switch does not  
start until after receiving the end of the current cell into the MTB.  
Changing the value of the LBA bit to switch ports will clear the ABSC bit of the LKSC register. When the switch  
from one port to the other is completed successfully then the hardware will set the ABSC bit. The processor can  
poll this bit to determine when the switch has been completed.  
34  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
Performance Monitoring  
LIVE TRAFFIC PERFORMANCE MONITORING  
Performance monitoring is carried out on live traffic in two ways. One is using the HEC bytes associated with  
each cell’s TC. The other is the BIP bytes of the F channel embedded in the frame structure, as described in  
BIP16.  
A 24-bit count of errored HEC’s received on Port A is contained in the RAHECC2–RAHECC0 registers (see  
RECEIVE PORT A HEC COUNT—0x2E to 0x30 RAHECC2 to RAHECC0). When the number of received erred  
HEC’s exceeds the threshold defined in the RAHECT2–RAHECT0 registers (see RECEIVE PORT A HEC  
THRESHOLD—0x31 to 0x33 RAHECT2 to RAHECT0), an interrupt may be raised on the RAXHEC alarm bit in  
the RAPA alarm register (see RECEIVE PORT A PERFORMANCE ALARMS—0x3A RAPA). The count register  
RAHECC2–RAHECC0 is reset on read.  
A 24-bit count of errored BIP bytes is similarly maintained in the RABIPC2–RABIPC0 registers (see RECEIVE  
PORT A BIP COUNT—0x34 to 0x36 RABIPC2 to RABIPC0). The associated erred BIP threshold is contained in  
the RABIPT2–RABIPT0 registers (see RECEIVE PORT A BIP THRESHOLD—0x36 to 0x39 RABIPT2 to  
RABIPT0) and an interrupt may be raised on the RAXBIP alarm bit in the RAPA alarm register. The count  
register RABIPC2–RABIPC0 is also reset on read.  
The same mechanism is in place for Port B using the RBHECC2–RBHECC0, RBHECT2–RBHECT0, RBBIPC2–  
RBBIPC0, RBBIPT2–RBBIPT0 and RBPA registers (see RECEIVE PORT B HEC COUNT—0x6E to 0x70  
RBHECC2 to RBHECC0, RECEIVE PORT B HEC THRESHOLD—0x71 to 0x73 RBHECT2 to RBHECT0,  
RECEIVE PORT  
B BIP COUNT—0x74 to 0x76 RBBIPC2 to RBBIPC0, RECEIVE PORT B BIP  
THRESHOLD—0x77 to 0x79 RBBIPT2 to RBBIPT0 and RECEIVE PORT B PERFORMANCE ALARMS—0x7A  
RBPA).  
In addition to the HEC and BIP monitoring, live traffic loopback cell monitoring and loopback cell counts are  
maintained and may raise interrupts on detection of a loopback cell as described in ATM CELL LOOPBACK.  
BIT ERROR COUNT MODE  
In addition to live traffic performance monitoring, a PRBS based LVDS link bit error count facility is available. In  
this mode, no cells are transmitted and instead the raw scrambler pseudo-random sequence (polynomial x31  
+
x28 + 1) is transmitted. The descrambler will lock to this sequence and then count individual bit errors in the  
PRBS stream. This bit error count is maintained in a count register. As there is no data cell delineation, the frame  
delineation will be lost. This is not a live traffic test.  
The device will transmit this PRBS data when the TXPRBS bit of the TERRCTL register is set (see TEST  
ERROR CONTROL—0x16 TERRCTL). When this bit is set, no cell data is transmitted and the TCS Assembler is  
paused. In addition, no cells will be read from the FIB queue.  
The receive section of Port A can lock onto this sequence and maintain the bit error count when the RABEC bit  
of the RACTL register is set (see RECEIVE PORT A CONTROL—0x24 RACTL). The bit error count is  
maintained in the RABEC2–RABEC0 registers (see RECEIVE PORT A BIT ERROR COUNT—0x43 to 0x45  
RABEC2 to RABEC0). This counter has no associated threshold register and will not generate an interrupt. The  
counter may be polled (read) at fixed intervals to determine a Bit Error Rate. This counter is reset on read. The  
count value is only valid when both the TXPRBS bit and the RABEC bit are set.  
Port B can operate in the same fashion using the RBBEC bit of the RBCTL register (RECEIVE PORT B  
CONTROL—0x64 RBCTL) and the RBBEC2–RBBEC0 registers (see RECEIVE PORT B BIT ERROR  
COUNT—0x83 to 0x85 RBBEC2 to RBBEC0).  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
35  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
Table 13. Performance Monitoring Alarms  
Performance Counter  
RAHECC2–RAHECC0  
(RECEIVE PORT A HEC COUNT—0x2E to  
0x30 RAHECC2 to RAHECC0)  
Associated Alarm  
Comments  
RAXHEC—Rx Port A Excessive HEC Errors.  
(RECEIVE PORT A PERFORMANCE  
ALARMS—0x3A RAPA)  
Rx Port A 24-bit errored HEC counter.  
Mission mode Up-Bridge receive  
direction HEC monitoring.  
RABIPC2–RABIPC0  
(RECEIVE PORT A BIP COUNT—0x34 to  
0x36 RABIPC2 to RABIPC0)  
RAXBIP—Rx Port A Excessive BIP Errors.  
(RECEIVE PORT A PERFORMANCE  
ALARMS—0x3A RAPA)  
Rx Port A 24-bit errored BIP counter.  
Mission mode link error monitoring.  
RABEC2–RABEC0  
(RECEIVE PORT A BIT ERROR  
COUNT—0x43 to 0x45 RABEC2 to RABEC0)  
None  
Rx Port A 24-bit Bit Error Counter.  
Non-mission mode BER counter of  
PRBS data on LVDS link.  
RBHECC2–RBHECC0  
(RECEIVE PORT B HEC COUNT—0x6E to  
0x70 RBHECC2 to RBHECC0)  
RBXHEC—Rx Port B Excessive HEC Errors.  
(RECEIVE PORT B PERFORMANCE  
ALARMS—0x7A RBPA)  
Rx Port B 24-bit errored HEC counter.  
Mission mode Up-Bridge receive  
direction HEC monitoring.  
RBBIPC2–RBBIPC0  
(RECEIVE PORT B BIP COUNT—0x74 to  
0x76 RBBIPC2 to RBBIPC0)  
RBXBIP—Rx Port B Excessive BIP Errors.  
(RECEIVE PORT B PERFORMANCE  
ALARMS—0x7A RBPA)  
Rx Port B 24-bit errored BIP counter.  
Mission mode link error monitoring.  
RBBEC2–RBBEC0  
(RECEIVE PORT B BIT ERROR  
COUNT—0x83 to 0x85 RBBEC2 to RBBEC0)  
None  
Rx Port B 24-bit Bit Error Counter.  
Non-mission mode BER counter of  
PRBS data on LVDS link.  
RAU2DLBC  
U2DLBC—Up-2-Down Loopback Cell Count  
Rx Port A 8-bit Loopback cell counter.  
Mission mode diagnostic aid.  
(RECEIVE PORT A UP2DOWN LOOPBACK Change. Cell(s) received on LVDS interface.  
CELL COUNT—0x3E RAU2DLBC)  
(UTOPIA AND ATM ALARMS—0xE1 UAA)  
RBU2DLBC  
U2DLBC—Up-2-Down Loopback Cell Count  
Rx Port B 8-bit Loopback cell counter.  
Mission mode diagnostic aid.  
(RECEIVE PORT B UP2DOWN LOOPBACK Change. Cell(s) received on LVDS interface.  
CELL COUNT—0x7E RBU2DLBC)  
(UTOPIA AND ATM ALARMS—0xE1 UAA)  
D2ULBCC  
(ATM DOWN2UP LOOPBACK CELL  
COUNT—0xE0 D2ULBCC)  
D2ULBC—Down-2-Up Loopback Cell Count  
Change. Cell(s) transmitted back out on UTOPIA  
interface. (UTOPIA AND ATM ALARMS—0xE1  
UAA)  
UTOPIA Interface 8-bit Loopback cell  
counter. Mission mode diagnostic aid.  
36  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
Table 14. General Alarms  
Alarms  
Description  
LLOSC (ECC TRANSMIT BUFFER AND RECEIVE LVDS  
ALARMS—0x0A ETXRXA)  
Change of Status on LLOSA or LLOSB.  
LLOSA (ECC TRANSMIT BUFFER AND RECEIVE LVDS  
ALARMS—0x0A ETXRXA)  
Loss of Signal on LVDS receive Port A.  
Loss of Signal on LVDS receive Port B.  
ECC transmit buffer ready for new message.  
Receive Port A. Link Label Change of value.  
LLOSB (ECC TRANSMIT BUFFER AND RECEIVE LVDS  
ALARMS—0x0A ETXRXA)  
ETXBR (ECC TRANSMIT BUFFER AND RECEIVE LVDS  
ALARMS—0x0A ETXRXA)  
RALLC (RECEIVE PORT A LOCAL ALARMS —0x22 RALA)  
RALLM (RECEIVE PORT A LOCAL ALARMS —0x22 RALA)  
Receive Port A. Link Label Mismatch between expected and  
received value.  
RALCS (RECEIVE PORT A LOCAL ALARMS —0x22 RALA)  
Receive Port A. Change of Status on RALDSLL, RALTCLL or  
RALFLL.  
RALDSLL (RECEIVE PORT A LOCAL ALARMS —0x22 RALA)  
RALTCLL (RECEIVE PORT A LOCAL ALARMS —0x22 RALA)  
RALFLL (RECEIVE PORT A LOCAL ALARMS —0x22 RALA)  
ERABF (RECEIVE PORT A LOCAL ALARMS —0x22 RALA)  
Receive Port A. Descrambler Loss of Lock.  
Receive Port A. Transport Container delineation Loss of Lock.  
Receive Port A. Frame delineation Loss of Lock.  
Receive Port A. ECC Receive Buffer Full—contains valid new  
message.  
RARCS (RECEIVE PORT A REMOTE STATUS AND  
ALARMS—0x3C RARA)  
Receive Port A. Remote Change of Status on RARLOSA,  
RARLOSB, RARBA or RARDSLL.  
RARLOSA (RECEIVE PORT A REMOTE STATUS AND  
ALARMS—0x3C RARA)  
Receive Port A. Remote Loss of Signal on LVDS receive Port A.  
Receive Port A. Remote Loss of Signal on LVDS receive Port B.  
Receive Port A. Remote Active receive port B or A.  
Receive Port A. Remote Descrambler Loss of Lock.  
Receive Port B. Link Label Change of value.  
RARLOSB (RECEIVE PORT A REMOTE STATUS AND  
ALARMS—0x3C RARA)  
RARBA (RECEIVE PORT A REMOTE STATUS AND  
ALARMS—0x3C RARA)  
RARDSLL (RECEIVE PORT A REMOTE STATUS AND  
ALARMS—0x3C RARA)  
RBLLC (RECEIVE PORT B LOCAL ALARMS—0x62 RBLA)  
RBLLM (RECEIVE PORT B LOCAL ALARMS—0x62 RBLA)  
Receive Port B. Link Label Mismatch between expected and  
received value.  
RBLCS (RECEIVE PORT B LOCAL ALARMS—0x62 RBLA)  
Receive Port B. Change of Status on RBLDSLL, RBLTCLL or  
RBLFLL.  
RBLDSLL (RECEIVE PORT B LOCAL ALARMS—0x62 RBLA)  
RBLTCLL (RECEIVE PORT B LOCAL ALARMS—0x62 RBLA)  
RBLFLL (RECEIVE PORT B LOCAL ALARMS—0x62 RBLA)  
ERBBF (RECEIVE PORT B LOCAL ALARMS—0x62 RBLA)  
Receive Port B. Descrambler Loss of Lock.  
Receive Port B. Transport Container delineation Loss of Lock.  
Receive Port B. Frame delineation Loss of Lock.  
Receive Port B. ECC Receive Buffer Full—contains valid new  
message.  
RBRCS (RECEIVE PORT B REMOTE STATUS AND  
ALARMS—0x7C RBRA)  
Receive Port B. Remote Change of Status on RBRLOSA,  
RBRLOSB, RBRBA or RBRDSLL.  
RBRLOSA (RECEIVE PORT B REMOTE STATUS AND  
ALARMS—0x7C RBRA)  
Receive Port B. Remote Loss of Signal on LVDS receive Port A  
Receive Port B. Remote Loss of Signal on LVDS receive Port B.  
Receive Port B. Remote Active receive port B or A.  
RBRLOSB (RECEIVE PORT B REMOTE STATUS AND  
ALARMS—0x7C RBRA)  
RBRBA (RECEIVE PORT B REMOTE STATUS AND  
ALARMS—0x7C RBRA)  
RBRDSLL (RECEIVE PORT B REMOTE STATUS AND  
ALARMS—0x7C RBRA)  
Receive Port B. Remote Descrambler Loss of Lock.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
37  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
Table 14. General Alarms (continued)  
Alarms  
Description  
PDU Length greater than 64 bytes.  
PDULA (UTOPIA AND ATM ALARMS—0xE1 UAA)  
CTFRA (UTOPIA AND ATM ALARMS—0xE1 UAA)  
UPRTY (UTOPIA AND ATM ALARMS—0xE1 UAA)  
FIBOVA (UTOPIA AND ATM ALARMS—0xE1 UAA)  
MTBSOVA (UTOPIA AND ATM ALARMS—0xE1 UAA)  
Cell Transfer error on UTOPIA interface.  
Parity error detected on UTOPIA interface.  
FIB buffer overflow (down-bridge).  
MTB Soft overflow. One or more of the 31 MTB queues has  
exceeded its programmed threshold (up-bridge).  
MTBHOVA (UTOPIA AND ATM ALARMS—0xE1 UAA)  
MTB Hard overflow. The MTB queue has overflowed (up-bridge).  
Loopback Operation  
To assist in diagnostic testing, the DS92UT16 provides both physical interface loopbacks and ATM cell  
loopbacks as shown in Figure 7 in LOOPBACKS. The former is suitable for designer or commission testing when  
the device is not passing live traffic. The latter allows cell trace testing on live traffic. All loopbacks are  
programmable via the microprocessor interface. The LVDS physical loopbacks are described in LOOPBACK  
TEST OPERATION.  
ATM CELL LOOPBACK  
The ATM Cell Loopback function provides two separate loopback operations. The Down2Up_ATM loopback  
detects special loopback cells received on the UTOPIA interface and transmits them back out over the UTOPIA  
interface. The Up2Down_ATM loopback detects special loopback cells received on the LVDS interface and  
transmits them back out over the LVDS interface. Figure 7(b) in LOOPBACKS illustrates both of these  
operations.  
These loopback circuits accommodate one loopback cell at a time. Therefore, a loopback cell should be sent and  
received before transmitting another loopback cell.  
The ATM and LVDS Loopback Control register ALBC controls the ATM cell loopback functionality. See  
GENERAL PURPOSE INPUT OUTPUT—0x15 GPIO. Bit D2ULB enables the Down2Up_ATM loopback and bit  
U2DLB enables the Up2Down_ATM loopback. It is possible to enable both loopback operations at the same  
time.  
The special loopback cell format is defined in the ATM Loopback Cell Format registers ALBCF3–ALBCF0. See  
ATM LOOPBACK CELL FORMAT —0x1C to 0x1F ALBCF3 to ALBCF0. These registers define the contents of  
the cell’s four header bytes, which indicate that a received cell is a loopback cell. Associated with the  
ALBCF3–ALBCF0 registers are the ATM Loopback Cell Filter registers ALFLT3–ALFLT0. See ATM LOOPBACK  
CELL FILTER—0xF7 to 0xFA ALFLT3 to AFLT0. These registers define the cell header bits that are compared  
with the header format declared in the ALBCF3–ALBCF0 registers. It is therefore possible to mask out any bits of  
the cell header from comparison.  
For Down2Up_ATM loopback on the UTOPIA interface only, a loopback cell will be sent back out to the MPhy  
address on which it was received. So, if a loopback cell was detected coming into the device on MPhy address  
0x01, then it will be sent back out of the device on the next occasion that a cell for MPhy address 0x01 is to be  
sent.  
For Up2Down_ATM loopback on the LVDS interface, the MPhy address is embedded in the incoming PDU.  
Therefore, the loopback cell is simply transmitted back out.  
For Down2Up_ATM loopback, only loopback cells as defined by the ALBCF3–ALBCF0 and ALFLT3–ALFLT0  
registers are looped-back and all other cells are passed as normal.  
For Up2Down_ATM loopback, only loopback cells as defined by the ALBCF3–ALBCF0 and ALFLT3–ALFLT0  
registers are looped back and all other cells are passed as normal.  
The Down2Up Loopback Cell Count register, the D2ULBCC in ATM DOWN2UP LOOPBACK CELL  
COUNT—0xE0 D2ULBCC, maintains a count of the Down2UP_ATM loopback cells. Whenever this counter  
increments, the D2ULBC alarm in the UAA register is set. See UTOPIA AND ATM ALARMS—0xE1 UAA. Note  
that this counter only increments when the loopback cell exits the device. So the D2ULBC counter increments on  
outgoing loopback cells.  
38  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
Both Receive Port A and Receive Port B maintain Up2Down_ATM loopback counts. The registers that maintain  
these counts are the Receive Port A Up2Down Loopback Cell Count register, RAU2DLBC, and the Receive Port  
B Up2Down Loopback Cell Count register, RBU2DLBC. See RECEIVE PORT A UP2DOWN LOOPBACK CELL  
COUNT—0x3E RAU2DLBC and RECEIVE PORT B UP2DOWN LOOPBACK CELL COUNT—0x7E RBU2DLBC.  
Whenever the counter in the Active receiver (as defined by the LBA bit of the LKSC, see LINK STATUS AND  
CONTROL—0x08 LKSC) increments, the U2DLBC alarm in the UAA register is set. See UTOPIA AND ATM  
ALARMS—0xE1 UAA. Although each counter increments whenever it detect an incoming loopback cell, only  
increments to the active receiver’s counter can set the alarm. Note that received loopback cells increment these  
counters. So the U2DLBC counter increments on incoming loopback cells.  
Alarms in the UAA register will raise an interrupt if the appropriate interrupt enables are set in the UAIE register.  
See UTOPIA AND ATM INTERRUPT ENABLES—0xE2 UAIE.  
Loopback cells are only counted and looped-back in the appropriate loopback mode. If the loopback mode is not  
set then any incoming loopback cells are simply treated as normal traffic cells and passed by the device. In  
Up2Down_ATM loopback mode, only cells from the Active receiver will be looped-back.  
A loopback cell transmission may be initiated by the DS92UT16 over the LVDS transmit link. The TXLVLB bit in  
the ALBC register controls this functionality. Setting the TXLVLB bit causes a single loopback cell to be  
transmitted over the LVDS transmit link. When the DS92UT16 finishes transmitting the loopback cell, it  
automatically clears the TXLVLB bit. So, the processor, on setting the TXLVLB bit, should poll it to detect that it  
clears before trying to set it again to send another loopback cell. The loopback cell transmitted will have a header  
of the format defined by the ALBCF3–ALBCF0 registers and an MPhy address as defined by the ALBMP register  
Embedded Communication Channel Operation  
This section describes the ECC operation. The ECC transmits one 8 byte message per frame over the link under  
software control. Flow control ensures that messages are not overwritten at the receive end.  
The message to be transmitted is written to the ETXD7–EXTD0 transmit buffer registers and the received  
messages are stored in the Port A ERAD7–ERAD0 or Port B ERBD7–ERBD0 receive buffer registers. Software  
control is achieved on the transmit side using the ECC Transmit Buffer Ready (ETXBR) interrupt of the ETXRXA  
register and the ECC Transmit Send (ETXSD) register.  
There are independent receive sections in Port A and Port B and these are controlled using the ECC Receive  
Port A Buffer Full (ERABF) interrupt of the Receive Port A Local Alarm (RALA) register, and the ECC Receive  
Port B Buffer Full (ERBBF) interrupt of the Receive Port B Local Alarm (RBLA) register respectively. The choice  
of receiving ECC messages on Port A or Port B is controlled by the ECCB and ECCA bits of the Link Status and  
Control (LKSC) register.  
The Remote Alarm and Signaling Byte carries the ECC signaling bits. The transmitted Remote Alarm and  
Signaling Byte carries the ESS signal for both of the local ECC receive sections, ESSA and ESSB. At the  
receiver a choice must be made as to which ESS bit of the received Remote Alarm and Signaling Byte is valid  
for the local ECC transmitter. This is controlled by the RAESS and RBESS bits of the RACTL and RBCTL  
registers respectively.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
39  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
Figure 15. The Basic Structure Of The ECC  
BASIC ECC PROTOCOL—ONE TRANSMIT AND ONE RECEIVE  
The basic operation of an ECC link is described here using the transmit section of the device at one end of the  
LVDS link and a single receive section (Port A) of the device at the other end of the link.  
The ECC transmitter and receiver communicate via the embedded control signals EVN, ESSA and ESSB in the  
Remote Alarm and Signaling byte contained in the F1 byte of TC6. By default both receive ports will extract the  
incoming ESSA bit as the valid ESS to pass to the ECC transmit section. This assumes that the local ECC  
transmit section is connected to the remote device receiver port A. If the local transmitter is connected to the  
remote device receiver port B then the incoming ESSB bit must be selected as the valid ESS to pass to the local  
ECC transmit section. The selection of valid incoming ESS bit is accomplished using the RAESS and RBESS  
bits of the RACTL and RBCTL registers respectively.  
Note that only one of the incoming remote ESS bits is valid on each link as the local transmitter cannot be  
connected to both receivers on another DS92UT16 device.  
The EVN and ESS bits are interpreted as follows:  
EVN - Set = Valid ECC data in F1/F2 bytes of TC13, TC20, TC41 and TC48.  
Clear = Null (not valid) ECC data in F1/F2 bytes of TC13, TC20, TC41 and TC48.  
ESS - Set = Stop sending ECC data as receive buffer is full.  
Clear = Send ECC data as receive buffer is ready.  
The protocol for transmission of an ECC message is as follows.  
Reset  
The transmit buffer ready ETXBR bit is set indicating that the transmit buffer ETXD7–ETXD0 can be written to  
and the Tx Buffer Freeze is clear (inactive).  
The transmit buffer send ETXSD bit is clear indicating that no message is being sent and therefore EVN is clear  
indicating to the receiver that Null data is being transmitted.  
The receive buffer full ERABF bit is clear indicating that no message has been received and therefore ESS is  
clear indicating to the transmitter that it can send a message when ready.  
40  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
Assembling A Message  
As the ETXBR bit is set the processor now has read/write access to the transmit buffer ETXD7–ETXD0 and can  
assemble a message by writing to these registers in any order. The message can be read back for checking.  
Writing to these registers does not affect the ETXBR and ETXSD bits or the EVN signal.  
Transmitting A Message  
To transmit a message the processor simply sets the send bit ETXSD. This clears the ETXBR bit preventing  
write access to the transmit buffer so the message being transmitted cannot be corrupted by writes to the  
ETXD7–ETXD0 registers until transmission is completed. The setting of the ETXSD bit also set the EVN signal  
indicating to the receiver that Valid data is being transmitted in the F1/F2 bytes of TC13, TC20, TC41 and TC48.  
Note that transmitting a message depends on the incoming ESS signal. If ESS is clear indicating that a message  
can be sent, then the processor can write to the ETXSD bit. However, if ESS is set indicating that a message  
cannot be sent, then the ETXSD bit is held in reset and cannot be written to by the processor to initiate  
transmission. This provides flow control from the receiver back to the transmitter.  
Receiving A Message  
As the receiver ERABF bit is clear the ESS bit is clear indicating that the receiver can accept a message. The  
receiver monitors the incoming EVN signal to determine when valid data is being transmitted.  
On detecting EVN set the receiver uses the TC number to extract the 8 ECC message bytes from the incoming  
data stream. If an errored HEC is detected on any of the ECC message bytes then the receiver assumes all 8  
bytes are corrupted and will re-extract the entire message on the next frame. The transmitter will continue to  
transmit the message as long as the ESS signal is clear.  
When the receiver determines that it has received the entire message it sets the receive buffer full ERABF bit.  
This prevents the receive buffer ERAD7–ERAD0 being updated by the incoming ECC bytes so that the message  
cannot be overwritten. It also raises an interrupt to the local processor to indicate that a valid ECC message has  
been received.  
The setting of the ERABF bit also sets the ESS signal back to the transmitter indicating that it should stop  
transmission. This clears the ETXSD bit which clears the EVN signal thus indicating that transmitted ECC data is  
Null (not valid).  
At this stage the receive buffer is full and cannot receive any further messages. The transmit buffer ready  
ETXBR is still clear meaning that no new messages can be assembled and ETXSD is held clear so no new  
messages can be transmitted. This flow control ensures that no new messages will be transmitted until the  
current received message is read. This situation will remain until the received message is read by the local  
processor.  
Reading A Message  
The setting of the ERABF bit in the receiver raises an interrupt to the local processor indicating that a valid ECC  
message has been received and can be read. The receive buffer registers ERAD7–ERAD0 are read only. The  
processor may read theses registers in any order and the reading of them has no affect on the ERABF bit or the  
ESS signal.  
When the processor is finished reading the message from the buffer it writes to the ERABF bit to clear it. This  
allows the receiver to receive a new message. The clearing of the ERABF bit clears the ESS signals indicating to  
the transmitter that it can send another message.  
Transmitting a New Message  
The clearing of the incoming ESS signal causes the transmitter to set the transmit buffer ETXBR bit. This allows  
write access to the transmit buffer ETXD7–ETXD0 for the assembly of a new message. It also releases the  
ETXSD bit from reset and the processor can now set this bit to send a new message.  
At this transmitter stage, the ETXBR bit is set, the ETXSD bit is clear, and EVN is clear. At the receiver, the  
ERABF bit is clear and the ESS signal is clear. This is the same situation as after reset and therefore, the same  
sequence as above can be followed to transmit a new message.  
Note that the transmit buffer registers can be modified or overwritten to assemble a new message for  
transmission, or the existing message can be resent simply by setting the ETXSD bit again.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
41  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
SUMMARY  
Tx - If the ETXBR bit is set, then write the message to the ETXD7–ETXD0 registers.  
Tx - Set the ETXSD bit to send the message. This clears ETXBR.  
Rx - When full message is received, the ERABF bit is set and this raises an interrupt.  
Rx - After reading the message, clear the ERABF bit to allow new message to be received.  
Tx - The clearing of the ERABF bit sets the ETXBR bit, which allows a new message to be assembled and  
transmitted.  
Flow Charts  
The Flow Charts in Figure 16 and Figure 17 summarize the control of the ECC receive and transmit.  
Figure 16. ECC Transmit Flow Chart  
Figure 17. ECC Receive Flow Chart (Port A)  
42  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
ECC OPERATION WITH ACTIVE AND STANDBY RECEIVERS  
The DS92UT16 has two independent receive sections, Port A and Port B. These each contain an ECC receive  
section and the ECC can be configured to receive over Port A or Port B or over both Port A and Port B together.  
The ECC receive port can be selected independent of the traffic receive port. Therefore, traffic data is received  
on the active port designated by the LBA bit of the LKSC register but the ECC can receive on either Port A or  
Port B as designated by the ECCA and ECCB bits of the same LKSC register. In a protected system with an  
active and standby LVDS link this can be used to communicate with the standby link while traffic continues to be  
received from the active link. Figure 18 shows three DS92UT16 devices with ECC communication over both  
links.  
ECC Receive on Port A: Device 1 communicating with Device 2 only.  
Device 1: For the ECC to communicate across Link A only, the ECCA bit of the LKSC register is set and the  
ECCB bit is clear. The incoming valid ESS signal received over Link A, “RxA valid ESS”, is the only one used by  
the ECC transmit section in Tx. The RxA port is programmed to extract the incoming ESSA bit as the valid ESS,  
as the Device 1 transmitter is connected to Device 2 receiver Port A. This is accomplished by clearing the  
RAESS bit of the RACTL register.  
In this case, when an ECC message is transmitted, the “RxA valid ESS” signals when the message has been  
successfully received by the far-end Device 2. So, ECC communications only occur over Link A between Device  
1 and Device 2.  
Device 2: The ECCA bit of the LKSC register is set and the ECCB bit is clear. The incoming valid ESS signal  
received over Link A, “RxA valid ESS”, is the only one used by the ECC transmit section in Tx. The RxA port is  
programmed to extract the incoming ESSA bit as the valid ESS, as the Device 2 transmitter is connected to  
Device 1 receiver Port A. This is accomplished by clearing the RAESS bit of the RACTL register.  
ECC Receive on Port B: Device 1 communicating with Device 3 only.  
Device 1: For the ECC to communicate across Link B only, the ECCA bit of the LKSC register is clear and the  
ECCB bit is set. The incoming valid ESS signal received over Link B, “RxB valid ESS”, is the only one used by  
the ECC transmit section in Tx. The RxB port is programmed to extract the incoming ESSB bit as the valid ESS,  
as the Device 1 transmitter is connected to Device 3 receiver Port B. This is accomplished by setting the RBESS  
bit of the RBCTL register.  
In this case, when an ECC message is transmitted, the “RxB valid ESS” signals when the message has been  
successfully received by the far-end Device 3. So, ECC communications only occur over Link B between Device  
1 and Device 3.  
Device 3: The ECCA bit of the LKSC register is clear and the ECCB bit is set. The incoming valid ESS signal  
received over Link B, “RxB valid ESS”, is the only one used by the ECC transmit section in Tx. The RxB port is  
programmed to extract the incoming ESSB bit as the valid ESS, as the Device 3 transmitter is connected to  
Device 1 receiver Port B. This is accomplished by setting the RBESS bit of the RBCTL register.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
43  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
ECC Receive on Port A and Port B: Device 1 communicating with Device 2 and Device 3.  
See Figure 18.  
Device 1: For the ECC to communicate across both Link A and Link B, the ECCB and ECCA bits of the LKSC  
register are both set. The incoming valid ESS signals received over Link A “RxA valid ESS” and Link B “RxB  
valid ESS” are both used by the ECC transmit section in Tx.  
In this case, when an ECC message is transmitted, both the “RxA valid ESS” and “RxB valid ESS” signals must  
be used to indicate that the message has been successfully received by both Device 2 and Device 3 before a  
new message can be transmitted. So ECC communications occur over both Link A and Link B.  
Device 2 and 3: are configured as above for communicating with only Device 1.  
Note that, when Device 1 wants to transmit a new message it must wait until both Device 2 and Device 3 indicate  
that they have received the last message. When Device 2 wants to transmit a new message it must only wait  
until Device 1 indicates that it has received the last message. Similarly for Device 3 transmitting a new message  
it must only wait until Device 1 indicates that it has received the last message  
Figure 18. ECC Signaling with Active and Standby Links  
44  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
Microprocessor Interface Operation  
The DS92UT16 contains a flexible microprocessor port capable of interfacing to either Intel or Motorola  
processors. In addition to an 8-bit address and 8-bit data bus plus the associated bus protocol control signals,  
the port includes an open-drain interrupt signal. This signal may be asserted on the detection of various alarms  
within the device and any of the potential internal sources of this interrupt may be individually inhibited via an  
interrupt mask.  
Powering down a Receive Port inhibits access to the associated registers. This feature saves power when a  
Receive Port is not in use. It allows re-reading the last value read from a register associated with that Receive  
Port and disallows writing to that port’s registers. Receive Port A (RxA) in Power-down mode inhibits access to  
registers described in RECEIVE PORT A LINK LABEL—0x20 RALL to RECEIVE PORT A BIT ERROR  
COUNT—0x43 to 0x45 RABEC2 to RABEC0. Receive Port B (RxB) in Power-down mode inhibits access to  
registers described in RECEIVE PORT B LINK LABEL—0x60 RBLL to RECEIVE PORT B BIT ERROR  
COUNT—0x83 to 0x85 RBBEC2 to RBBEC0. The contents of these registers are not lost or altered in Power-  
down mode.  
Typical processor Read and Write cycles for this device are shown in Figure 19, Figure 20, Figure 21, Figure 22.  
The associated timing for each cycle is given in Table 15, Table 16, Table 17, Table 18.  
Figure 19. Intel Write Cycle  
Table 15. Intel Write  
No.  
1
Parameter  
Address Setup Time before Chip Select Low  
Chip Select Setup before Write Low  
Write Pulse Width(1)(2)  
Min  
Max  
Units  
ns  
0
2
5
ns  
3
6 cycles  
4
Data Setup before Write High(1)(2)  
5 cycles  
5
Data Hold after Write High  
5
ns  
ns  
ns  
6
Chip Select Hold after Write High  
Address Hold after Write High  
Write Recovery Time(1)(3)  
5
0
7
8
1 cycle  
(1) “Cycle” must be greater than or equal to the cycle time of the slowest DS92UT16 clock.  
(2) When an LVDS receiver loses or gains “lock”, the recovered clock may stay high for up to 2.5 cycles.  
If a processor access is in progress to one of the registers in either of the recovered clock domains,  
then a READ will return the value of the last READ access, and a WRITE will not change the value of  
the target register. To accommodate this possible gap in the clock, 3 cycles has been added to these  
timings and they should therefore be regarded as worst case. If access time needs to be increased  
and a system is robust enough to accept these possible incorrect accesses then 3 cycles can be  
removed from these timings.  
(3) A recovery time of 1 cycle is required between successive processor accesses.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
45  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
 
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
Figure 20. Intel Read Cycle  
Table 16. Intel Read  
No.  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Units  
ns  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Address Setup Time before Chip Select Low  
Chip Select Setup before Write Low  
Read Pulse Width(1)(2)  
0
0
ns  
8 cycles  
Read Low to Data Low Impedance  
Read Low to Valid Data(1)(2)  
10  
7 cycles + 15 ns  
15  
ns  
Read High to Data High Impedance  
Chip Select Hold after Read High  
Address Hold after Read High  
Read Recovery Time(1)(3)  
ns  
ns  
ns  
0
0
1 cycle  
(1) “Cycle” must be greater than or equal to the cycle time of the slowest DS92UT16 clock.  
(2) When an LVDS receiver loses or gains “lock”, the recovered clock may stay high for up to 2.5 cycles.  
If a processor access is in progress to one of the registers in either of the recovered clock domains,  
then a READ will return the value of the last READ access, and a WRITE will not change the value of  
the target register. To accommodate this possible gap in the clock, 3 cycles has been added to these  
timings and they should therefore be regarded as worst case. If access time needs to be increased  
and a system is robust enough to accept these possible incorrect accesses then 3 cycles can be  
removed from these timings.  
(3) A recovery time of 1 cycle is required between successive processor accesses.  
46  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
Figure 21. Motorola Write Cycle  
Table 17. Motorola Write  
No.  
1
Parameter  
Address Setup Time before Chip Select Low  
Chip Select Setup before Data Strobe Low  
Read/Write Setup before Data Strobe Low  
Data Strobe Pulse Width(1)(2)  
Min  
Max  
Units  
ns  
0
2
0
ns  
3
5
ns  
4
6 cycles  
5
Data Setup before Data Strobe High(1)(2)  
5 cycles  
6
Data Hold after Data Strobe High  
5
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
7
Read/Write Hold after Data Strobe High  
Chip Select Hold after Data Strobe High  
Address Hold after Data Strobe High  
Data Strobe Recovery Time(1)(3)  
5
8
5
0
9
10  
1 cycle  
(1) “Cycle” must be greater than or equal to the cycle time of the slowest DS92UT16 clock.  
(2) When an LVDS receiver loses or gains “lock”, the recovered clock may stay high for up to 2.5 cycles.  
If a processor access is in progress to one of the registers in either of the recovered clock domains,  
then a READ will return the value of the last READ access, and a WRITE will not change the value of  
the target register. To accommodate this possible gap in the clock, 3 cycles has been added to these  
timings and they should therefore be regarded as worst case. If access time needs to be increased  
and a system is robust enough to accept these possible incorrect accesses then 3 cycles can be  
removed from these timings.  
(3) A recovery time of 1 cycle is required between successive processor accesses.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
47  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
Figure 22. Motorola Read Cycle  
Table 18. Motorola Read  
No.  
Parameter  
Min  
Max  
Units  
ns  
1
2
Address Setup Time before Chip Select Low  
Chip Select Setup before Data Strobe Low  
Read/Write Setup before Data Strobe Low  
Data Strobe Pulse Width(1)(2)  
0
0
5
ns  
3
ns  
4
8 cycles  
5
Data Strobe Low to Data Low Impedance  
Data Strobe Low to Valid Data(1)(2)  
10  
7 cycles + 15 ns  
15  
ns  
6
7
Data Strobe High to Data High Impedance  
Read/Write Hold after Data Strobe High  
Chip Select Hold after Data Strobe High  
Address Hold after Data Strobe High  
Data Strobe Recovery Time(1)(3)  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
8
5
9
5
0
10  
11  
1 cycle  
(1) “Cycle” must be greater than or equal to the cycle time of the slowest DS92UT16 clock.  
(2) When an LVDS receiver loses or gains “lock”, the recovered clock may stay high for up to 2.5 cycles.  
If a processor access is in progress to one of the registers in either of the recovered clock domains,  
then a READ will return the value of the last READ access, and a WRITE will not change the value of  
the target register. To accommodate this possible gap in the clock, 3 cycles has been added to these  
timings and they should therefore be regarded as worst case. If access time needs to be increased  
and a system is robust enough to accept these possible incorrect accesses then 3 cycles can be  
removed from these timings.  
(3) A recovery time of 1 cycle is required between successive processor accesses.  
SOFTWARE LOCK  
Note that the device has a software lock mechanism implemented for security. This is described in CPU  
INTERFACE and SOFTWARE LOCK—0x00 to 0x01 SLK0 to SLK1.  
48  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
Register Description  
This section describes all the software accessible registers in the DS92UT16. A summary of all registers is  
shown in Table 19.  
Table 19. Register Map Summary(1)(2)(3)  
Software  
Lock  
Reset  
Value  
Register Name  
SLK0  
Address  
Section and Description  
0x00  
0x01  
0x02  
0x03  
0x04  
0x05  
0x06  
0x07  
0x08  
0x09  
0x0A  
0x0B  
0x0C  
0x0D  
0x0E  
0x0F  
0x10  
0x11  
0x12  
0x13  
0x14  
0x15  
0x16  
0x17  
0x18  
0x19  
0x1A  
0x1B  
0x1C  
0x1D  
0x1E  
0x1F  
0x20  
0x21  
0x22  
0x23  
0x24  
0x25  
0x26  
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
0x00  
0x00  
See(4)  
0x05  
0x3B  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x34  
0x00  
0x01  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0xF0  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x01  
18.1 Software Lock 1  
18.1 Software Lock 2  
18.2 Version Identification  
SLK1  
VID  
GCS  
18.3 General Control and Status  
18.4 LVDS Control  
LVC  
PDUCFG  
IS  
18.5 PDU Configuration  
18.6 Interrupt Source  
ISE  
18.7 Interrupt Source Enables  
18.8 Link Status and Control  
LKSC  
TXLL  
18.9 Transmit Link Label  
ETXRXA  
ETXRXIE  
ETXSD  
ETXD7  
ETXD6  
ETXD5  
ETXD4  
ETXD3  
ETXD2  
ETXD1  
ETXD0  
GPIO  
18.10 ECC Transmit Buffer and Receive LVDS Alarms  
18.11 ECC Transmit Buffer and Receive LVDS Interrupt Enables  
18.12 ECC Transmit Buffer Send  
18.13 ECC Transmit Buffer 7  
18.13 ECC Transmit Buffer 6  
18.13 ECC Transmit Buffer 5  
18.13 ECC Transmit Buffer 4  
18.13 ECC Transmit Buffer 3  
18.13 ECC Transmit Buffer 2  
18.13 ECC Transmit Buffer 1  
18.13 ECC Transmit Buffer 0  
18.14 General Purpose Input/Output  
18.15 Test Error Control  
TERRCTL  
ERRBIP1  
ERRBIP0  
ERRHEC  
ALBC  
18.16 BIP Error Mask 1  
18.16 BIP Error Mask 0  
18.17 HEC Error Mask 0  
18.18 ATM and LVDS Loopback Control  
18.19 ATM Loopback Cell MPhy  
18.20 ATM Loopback Cell Format 3  
18.20 ATM Loopback Cell Format 2  
18.20 ATM Loopback Cell Format 1  
18.20 ATM Loopback Cell Format 0  
18.21 Receive Port A Link Label  
18.22 Receive Port A Expected Link Label  
18.23 Receive Port A Local Alarms  
18.24 Receive Port A Local Interrupt Enables  
18.25 Receive Port A Control  
ALBMP  
ALBCF3  
ALBCF2  
ALBCF1  
ALBCF0  
RALL  
RAELL  
RALA  
RALIE  
RACTL  
Reserved  
ERAD7  
N
0x00  
18.26 ECC Receive Buffer A 7  
(1) All configuration and control registers can be read by the processor to determine the status of the DS92UT16.  
(2) All reserved (register bits for internal use only) and unused (no register) bits will be read as zero and should be written as zero to ensure  
future compatibility.  
(3) Writing to read only register bits has no affect.  
(4) The reset value of the VID register will be different for various versions of the device.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
49  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
Table 19. Register Map Summary(1)(2)(3) (continued)  
Software  
Lock  
Reset  
Value  
Register Name  
ERAD6  
Address  
Section and Description  
0x27  
0x28  
0x29  
0x2A  
0x2B  
0x2C  
0x2D  
0x2E  
0x2F  
0x30  
0x31  
0x32  
0x33  
0x34  
0x35  
0x36  
0x37  
0x38  
0x39  
0x3A  
0x3B  
0x3C  
0x3D  
0x3E  
0x3F  
0x40  
0x41  
0x42  
0x43  
0x44  
0x45  
0x46  
0x47  
0x48  
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0xFF  
0xFF  
0xFF  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0xFF  
0xFF  
0xFF  
0x00  
0x00  
0x0D  
0x00  
0x00  
18.26 ECC Receive Buffer A 6  
ERAD5  
18.26 ECC Receive Buffer A 5  
ERAD4  
18.26 ECC Receive Buffer A 4  
ERAD3  
18.26 ECC Receive Buffer A 3  
ERAD2  
18.26 ECC Receive Buffer A 2  
ERAD1  
18.26 ECC Receive Buffer A 1  
ERAD0  
18.26 ECC Receive Buffer A 0  
RAHECC2  
RAHECC1  
RAHECC0  
RAHECT2  
RAHECT1  
RAHECT0  
RABIPC2  
RABIPC1  
RABIPC0  
RABIPT2  
RABIPT1  
RABIPT0  
RAPA  
18.27 Receive Port A HEC Count 2  
18.27 Receive Port A HEC Count 1  
18.27 Receive Port A HEC Count 0  
18.28 Receive Port A HEC Threshold 2  
18.28 Receive Port A HEC Threshold 1  
18.28 Receive Port A HEC Threshold 0  
18.29 Receive Port A BIP Count 2  
18.29 Receive Port A BIP Count 1  
18.29 Receive Port A BIP Count 0  
18.30 Receive Port A BIP Threshold 2  
18.30 Receive Port A BIP Threshold 1  
18.30 Receive Port A BIP Threshold 0  
18.31 Receive Port A Performance Alarms  
18.32 Receive Port A Performance Interrupt Enables  
18.33 Receive Port A Remote Alarms  
18.34 Receive Port A Remote Interrupt Enables  
18.35 Receive Port A ATM Up2Down Loopback Cell Count  
RAPIE  
RARA  
RARIE  
RAU2DLBC  
Unused  
RACDT  
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
0x78  
0x78  
0x88  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
18.36 Receive Port A Cell Delineation Thresholds  
18.37 Receive Port A Frame Delineation Thresholds  
18.38 Receive Port a Descrambler Lock Thresholds  
18.38 Receive Port A Bit Error Count 2  
RAFDT  
RADSLKT  
RABEC2  
RABEC1  
RABEC0  
Unused  
18.38 Receive Port A Bit Error Count 1  
18.38 Receive Port A Bit Error Count 0  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Unused  
0x49 to  
0x56  
Resered  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Unused  
0x57  
0x58  
0x59  
0x5A  
0x5B  
0x5C  
0x5D  
0x5E  
0x5F  
0x60  
0x61  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
RBLL  
N
N
0x00  
0x00  
18.40 Receive Port B Link Label  
RBELL  
18.41 Receive Port B Expected Link Label  
50  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
Table 19. Register Map Summary(1)(2)(3) (continued)  
Software  
Lock  
Reset  
Value  
Register Name  
Address  
Section and Description  
RBLA  
0x62  
0x63  
0x64  
0x65  
0x66  
0x67  
0x68  
0x69  
0x6A  
0x6B  
0x6C  
0x6D  
0x6E  
0x6F  
0x70  
0x71  
0x72  
0x73  
0x74  
0x75  
0x76  
0x77  
0x78  
0x79  
0x7A  
0x7B  
0x7C  
0x7D  
0x7E  
0x7F  
0x80  
0x81  
0x82  
0x83  
0x84  
0x85  
0x86  
0x87  
0x88  
N
N
Y
0x00  
0x00  
0x01  
18.42 Receive Port B Local Alarms  
RBLIE  
18.43 Receive Port B Local Interrupt Enables  
18.44 Receive Port B Control  
RBCTL  
Reserved  
ERBD7  
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0xFF  
0xFF  
0xFF  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0xFF  
0xFF  
0xFF  
0x00  
0x00  
0x0D  
0x00  
0x00  
18.45 ECC Receive Buffer B 7  
ERBD6  
18.45 ECC Receive Buffer B 6  
ERBD5  
18.45 ECC Receive Buffer B 5  
ERBD4  
18.45 ECC Receive Buffer B 4  
ERBD3  
18.45 ECC Receive Buffer B 3  
ERBD2  
18.45 ECC Receive Buffer B 2  
ERBD1  
18.45 ECC Receive Buffer B 1  
ERBD0  
18.45 ECC Receive Buffer B 0  
RBHECC2  
RBHECC1  
RBHECC0  
RBHECT2  
RBHECT1  
RBHECT0  
RBBIPC2  
RBBIPC1  
RBBIPC0  
RBBIPT2  
RBBIPT1  
RBBIPT0  
RBPA  
18.46 Receive Port B HEC Count 2  
18.46 Receive Port B HEC Count 1  
18.46 Receive Port B HEC Count 0  
18.47 Receive Port B HEC Threshold 2  
18.47 Receive Port B HEC Threshold 1  
18.47 Receive Port B HEC Threshold 0  
18.48 Receive Port B BIP Count 2  
18.48 Receive Port B BIP Count 1  
18.48 Receive Port B BIP Count 0  
18.49 Receive Port B BIP Threshold 2  
18.49 Receive Port B BIP Threshold 1  
18.49 Receive Port B BIP Threshold 0  
18.50 Receive Port B Performance Alarms  
18.51 Receive Port B Performance Interrupt Enables  
18.52 Receive Port B Remote Alarms  
18.53 Receive Port B Remote Interrupt Enables  
18.54 Receive Port B ATM Up2Down Loopback Cell Count  
RBPIE  
RBRA  
RBRIE  
RBU2DLBC  
Unused  
RBCDT  
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
0x78  
0x78  
0x88  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
18.55 Receive Port B Cell Delineation Thresholds  
18.56 Receive Port B Frame Delineation Thresholds  
18.57 Receive Port B Descrambler Lock Thresholds  
18.58 Receive Port Bit Error Count 2  
RBFDT  
RBDSLKT  
RBBEC2  
RBBEC1  
RBBEC0  
Unused  
18.58 Receive Port Bit Error Count 1  
18.58 Receive Port Bit Error Count 0  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Unused  
0x89 to  
0x96  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Unused  
0x97  
0x98  
0x99  
0x9A  
0x9B  
0x9C  
Reserved  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
51  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
Table 19. Register Map Summary(1)(2)(3) (continued)  
Software  
Lock  
Reset  
Value  
Register Name  
Address  
Section and Description  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
UCFG  
0x9D  
0x9E  
0x9F  
0xA0  
0xA1  
0xA2  
0xA3  
0xA4  
0xA5  
0xA6  
0xA7  
0xA8  
0xA9  
0xAA  
0xAB  
0xAC  
0xAD  
0xAE  
0xAF  
0xB0  
0xB1  
0xB2  
0xB3  
0xB4  
0xB5  
0xB6  
0xB7  
0xB8  
0xB9  
0xBA  
0xBB  
0xBC  
0xBD  
0xBE  
0xBF  
0xC0  
0xC1  
0xC2  
0xC3  
0xC4  
0xC5  
0xC6  
0xC7  
0xC8  
0xC9  
0xCA  
0xCB  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
0x00  
0x7F  
0xFF  
0xFF  
0xFF  
18.59 UTOPIA Configuration  
UCPL3  
18.60 UTPOIA Connected Port List 3  
18.60 UTPOIA Connected Port List 2  
18.60 UTPOIA Connected Port List 1  
18.60 UTPOIA Connected Port List 0  
UCPL2  
UCPL1  
UCPL0  
Reserved  
UCSPL  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
0x01  
0x00  
0x07  
0x04  
0x04  
0x04  
0x04  
0x04  
0x04  
0x04  
0x04  
0x04  
0x04  
0x04  
0x04  
0x04  
0x04  
0x04  
0x04  
0x04  
0x04  
0x04  
0x04  
0x04  
0x04  
0x04  
0x04  
0x04  
0x04  
0x04  
0x04  
0x04  
0x04  
0x04  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
18.61 UTOPIA Connected Sub-Port List  
18.62 UTOPIA Sub-Port Address Location  
18.63 UTOPIA Sub-Port Address Mask  
18.64 MTB Queue Threshold 30  
18.64 MTB Queue Threshold 29  
18.64 MTB Queue Threshold 28  
18.64 MTB Queue Threshold 27  
18.64 MTB Queue Threshold 26  
18.64 MTB Queue Threshold 25  
18.64 MTB Queue Threshold 24  
18.64 MTB Queue Threshold 23  
18.64 MTB Queue Threshold 22  
18.64 MTB Queue Threshold 21  
18.64 MTB Queue Threshold 20  
18.64 MTB Queue Threshold 19  
18.64 MTB Queue Threshold 18  
18.64 MTB Queue Threshold 17  
18.64 MTB Queue Threshold 16  
18.64 MTB Queue Threshold 15  
18.64 MTB Queue Threshold 14  
18.64 MTB Queue Threshold 13  
18.64 MTB Queue Threshold 12  
18.64 MTB Queue Threshold 11  
18.64 MTB Queue Threshold 10  
18.64 MTB Queue Threshold 9  
18.64 MTB Queue Threshold 8  
18.64 MTB Queue Threshold 7  
18.64 MTB Queue Threshold 6  
18.64 MTB Queue Threshold 5  
18.64 MTB Queue Threshold 4  
18.64 MTB Queue Threshold 3  
18.64 MTB Queue Threshold 2  
18.64 MTB Queue Threshold 1  
18.64 MTB Queue Threshold 0  
18.65 MTB Queue Full 3  
USPAL  
USPAM  
MTBQT30  
MTBQT29  
MTBQT28  
MTBQT27  
MTBQT26  
MTBQT25  
MTBQT24  
MTBQT23  
MTBQT22  
MTBQT21  
MTBQT20  
MTBQT19  
MTBQT18  
MTBQT17  
MTBQT16  
MTBQT15  
MTBQT14  
MTBQT13  
MTBQT12  
MTBQT11  
MTBQT10  
MTBQT9  
MTBQT8  
MTBQT7  
MTBQT6  
MTBQT5  
MTBQT4  
MTBQT3  
MTBQT2  
MTBQT1  
MTBQT0  
MTBQFL3  
MTBQFL2  
MTBQFL1  
MTBQFL0  
18.65 MTB Queue Full 2  
18.65 MTB Queue Full 1  
18.65 MTB Queue Full 0  
52  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
Table 19. Register Map Summary(1)(2)(3) (continued)  
Software  
Lock  
Reset  
Value  
Register Name  
Address  
Section and Description  
MTBQE3  
MTBQE2  
MTBQE1  
MTBQE0  
MTBQF3  
MTBQF2  
MTBQF1  
MTBQF0  
MTBCF3  
MTBCF2  
MTBCF1  
MTBCF0  
QFL  
0xCC  
0xCD  
0xCE  
0xCF  
0xD0  
0xD1  
0xD2  
0xD3  
0xD4  
0xD5  
0xD6  
0xD7  
0xD8  
0xD9  
0xDA  
0xDB  
0xDC  
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
0x7F  
0xFF  
0xFF  
0xFF  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
18.66 MTB Queue Empty 3  
18.66 MTB Queue Empty 2  
18.66 MTB Queue Empty 1  
18.66 MTB Queue Empty 0  
18.67 MTB Queue Flush 3  
18.67 MTB Queue Flush 2  
18.67 MTB Queue Flush 1  
18.67 MTB Queue Flush 0  
18.68 MTB Cell Flush 3  
18.68 MTB Cell Flush 2  
18.68 MTB Cell Flush 1  
18.68 MTB Cell Flush 0  
18.69 Queue Flush  
MTBQOV3  
MTBQOV2  
MTBQOV1  
MTBQOV0  
Unused  
18.70 MTB Queue Overflow 3  
18.70 MTB Queue Overflow 2  
18.70 MTB Queue Overflow 1  
18.70 MTB Queue Overflow 0  
0xDD to  
0xDF  
D2ULBCC  
UAA  
0xE0  
0xE1  
0xE2  
N
N
N
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
18.71 ATM Down2Up Loopback Cell Count  
18.72 UTOPIA and ATM Alarms  
UAIE  
18.73 UTOPIA and ATM Interrupt Enables  
Unused  
0xE3 to  
0xF6  
ALFLT3  
ALFLT2  
ALFLT1  
ALFLT0  
Unused  
0xF7  
0xF8  
0xF9  
0xFA  
0xFB  
0xFC  
0xFD  
0xFE  
0xFF  
N
N
N
N
0xFF  
0xFF  
0xFF  
0xFF  
18.74 ATM Loopback Cell Filter 3  
18.74 ATM Loopback Cell Filter 2  
18.74 ATM Loopback Cell Filter 1  
18.74 ATM Loopback Cell Filter 0  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
53  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
SOFTWARE LOCK—0x00 to 0x01 SLK0 to SLK1  
Table 20. SLK0–SLK1(1)(2)(3)  
7
0
0
6
0
0
5
0
0
4
0
0
3
0
0
2
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
SLK0 0x00  
SLK1 0x01  
(1) All configuration and control registers can be read by the processor to determine the status of the  
DS92UT16.  
(2) All reserved (register bits for internal use only) and unused (no register) bits will be read as zero and  
should be written as zero to ensure future compatibility.  
(3) Writing to read only register bits has no affect.  
Type: Read as 0x00  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The Software Lock registers are used to implement a software lock mechanism on configuration and control  
registers to prevent spurious software changes to the device which may affect its operation. On reset the  
Software Lock is ON. Writes to registers protected by this lock will have no affect. To switch the lock OFF the  
following sequence of writes to the SLK registers must occur.  
UNLOCK SEQUENCE  
1. Write data 0x00 to SLK0.  
2. Write data 0xFF to SLK1.  
The software lock is now OFF and those registers protected by it can be successfully written to.  
To switch the lock back On the following sequence of writes to the SLK registers must occur.  
LOCK SEQUENCE  
1. Write data 0xDE to SLK0.  
2. Write data 0xAD to SLK1.  
The software lock is now ON and those registers protected by it cannot be written to.  
The order of the writes in each sequence must be followed. However, the sequence does not have to be  
contiguous. For instance, the processor can Write data 0xDE to SLK0, then carry out further read/write cycles to  
this or another device before completing the LOCK sequence with Write data 0xAD to SLK1.  
The full lock or unlock sequence must be completed to take effect.  
The status of the Software Lock can be read at any time from the SLOCK bit of the GCS register.  
VERSION IDENTIFICATION—0x02 VID  
Table 21. VID  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
VID[7]  
VID[6]  
VID[5]  
VID[4]  
VID[3]  
VID[2]  
VID[1]  
VID[0]  
Type: Read only  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value:(1)  
VID[7:0] Version identification number. NOTE that this is only a proprietary Version number and that the  
standard Device ID register is contained in the JTAG TAP controller as described in Test Features.  
(1) The reset value of the VID register will be different for various versions of the device.  
54  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
GENERAL CONTROL AND STATUS—0x03 GCS  
Table 22. GCS  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
Reserved  
GIE  
LT  
RESET  
CTI  
TIS  
SLOCK  
Type: Bits[5:2] Read/Write  
Bit[1:0] Read Only  
Software Lock: Yes  
Reset Value: 0x05  
GIE The Global Interrupt Enable enables the device interrupt output pin CPU_INT. Set = Interrupts enabled  
and Clear = Interrupts disabled.  
LT The Loop Timing bit enables the connection of the Active Rx port recovered clock to the LVDS Transmit  
clock (the active Rx port is as defined by the LBA bit of the LKSC register). LT Set = LVDS Tx clock sourced  
from Active Rx port recovered clock. LT Clear = LVDS Tx clock sourced from LVDS_TxClk pin.  
RESET Set = Software reset of all registers except this bit. The Software Lock status as refiected by SLOCK  
is also not affected by a software reset.  
CTI Configuration Traffic Inhibit. The setting of this bit initiates the Traffic Inhibit functionality, which stops  
traffic flow. The UTOPIA interface will stop transmitting and receiving cells, the LVDS transmit section will  
transmit Idle cells and the incoming cells on the active LVDS receive port will be discarded. The MTB and FIB  
queues must also be flushed. This bit should be set by the processor whenever the device is being  
fundamentally reconfigured from the default settings, specifically whenever any of the PDUCFG, UCFG,  
USPAL or USPAM registers are being changed. The processor should set this bit before changing any of the  
above mentioned register settings. This will initiate Traffic Inhibit. The TIS bit should then be polled until set to  
confirm that traffic is inhibited. Note that the MTB and FIB queues MUST be flushed at this stage. This is  
accomplished with the FIBFL and MTBFL bits of the QFL register described in QUEUE FLUSH—0xD8  
QFL. The device can now be safely reconfigured. When the TIS bit is set, then traffic is inhibited and the  
device can safely be reconfigured. When configuration is completed, then the CTI bit can be cleared by the  
processor and normal operation resumed. Note that CTI is set on reset so the device is in Traffic Inhibit  
mode. See Configuration and Traffic Inhibit Operation.  
TIS Traffic Inhibit Status. This bit reflects the status of the Traffic Inhibit functionality. When set then traffic is  
inhibited as described for the CTI bit above. When clear then the device operates normally. The setting of the  
CTI bit will initiate Traffic Inhibit which sets the TIS bit. Clearing of the CTI bit clears the TIS bit.  
SLOCK This refiects the status of the Software Lock functionality. Set = Software lock ON and Clear =  
Software Lock OFF. The processor can use this bit to determine the Software Lock functionality status when  
writing to lockable registers.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
55  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
LVDS CONTROL—0x04 LVC  
Table 23. LVC  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
Reserved  
TXPWDN  
TXBDEN  
TXADEN  
TXSYNC  
RAPWDN  
RBPWDN  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: Yes  
Reset Value: 0x3B  
The LVDS control register configures the LVDS serializer/deserializers.  
TXPWDN Transmit section LVDS power down. Set = Power Up and Clear = Power Down. This register value  
is combined with the LVDS_TxPwdn pin to generate the internal power down setting for transmit section. If  
either this register bit or the LVDS_TxPwdn pin is clear then the transmit LVDS section is powered down.  
TBDEN LVDS B Transmit data output enable. Set = Enable and Clear = Disable. This register value is  
combined with the LVDS_BDenb pin to generate the output enable for the LVDS transmit section B. If either  
this register bit or the LVDS_BDenb pin is clear then the transmitter B output is disabled.  
TXADEN LVDS A Transmit data output enable. Set = Enable and Clear = Disable. This register value is  
combined with the LVDS_ADenb pin to generate the output enable for the LVDS transmit section A. If either  
this register bit or the LVDS_ADenb pin is clear then the transmitter A output is disabled.  
TXSYNC Transmit LVDS synchronization pattern. Set = Enable and Clear = Disable. This register value is  
combined with the LVDS_Synch pin to generate the SYNCH input to the LVDS transmit section. If either this  
register bit or the LVDS_Synch pin is set then SYNCH patterns are output from the LVDS transmit section.  
RAPWDN Receive Port A LVDS power down. Set = Power Up and Clear = Power Down. This register value  
is combined with the LVDS_APwdn pin to generate the internal power down setting for receive Port A. If  
either this register bit or the LVDS_APwdn pin is clear then the receive Port A LVDS section is powered  
down.  
RBPWDN Receive Port B LVDS power down. Set = Power Up and Clear = Power Down. This register value  
is combined with the LVDS_BPwdn pin to generate the internal power down setting for receive Port B. If  
either this register bit or the LVDS_BPwdn pin is clear then the receive Port B LVDS section is powered  
down.  
PDU CONFIGURATION—0x05 PDUCFG  
Table 24. PDUCFG  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
UP[2]  
UP[1]  
UP[0]  
UDF  
UA[2]  
UA[1]  
UA[0]  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: Yes  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The PDU Configuration register defines the contents and size of the PDU cells. The register does this by defining  
the size of the User Prepend, whether or not the UDF is to be transported, and the size of the User Append. The  
total size of the PDU must be in the range 52 to 64 bytes. Therefore the total size of the User Prepend, plus UDF  
and User Append must not exceed 12 bytes. Further, as the DS92UT16 operates with an internal 16 bit data  
path the size of the User Prepend and User Append is defined in words (16 bits/2 bytes). If the UDF is to be  
transported, then in UTOPIA 16-bit mode UDF1 and UDF2 bytes are transported and in UTOPIA 8-bit mode the  
UDF byte is transported.  
UP[2:0] The UP bits define the length of the User Prepend. Range 0 to 6 words.  
UDF The UDF bit when set indicates that the UDF word should be transported. When cleared the UDF word  
is not transported.  
UA[2:0] The UA bits define the length of the User Append. Range 0 to 6 words.  
56  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
INTERRUPT SOURCE—0x06 IS  
Table 25. IS  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
UAA  
ETXRXA  
RBLA  
RBPA  
RBRA  
RALA  
RAPA  
RARA  
Type: Read only/Clear on Read  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The Interrupt Source register reflects the source of pending interrupts.  
UAA Set = Interrupt pending in the UAA register.  
ETXRXA Set = Interrupt pending in the ETXRXA register.  
RBLA Set = Interrupt pending in the RBLA register.  
RBPA Set = Interrupt pending in the RBPA register.  
RBRA Set = Interrupt pending in the RBRA register.  
RALA Set = Interrupt pending in the RALA register.  
RAPA Set = Interrupt pending in the RAPA register.  
RARA Set = Interrupt pending in the RARA register.  
INTERRUPT SOURCE ENABLES—0x07 ISE  
Table 26. ISE  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
UAAIE  
ETXRXAIE  
RBLAIE  
RBPAIE  
RBRAIE  
RALAIE  
RAPAIE  
RARAIE  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
This register contains the interrupt enables for the corresponding alarms in the IS register. Set = interrupt  
sources enabled and Clear = interrupt sources disabled.  
LINK STATUS AND CONTROL—0x08 LKSC  
Table 27. LKSC  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RDSLKOV  
SCDIS  
CEN  
ECCA  
ECCB  
ABSC  
LBA  
FTXSCR  
Type: Bits[7:3] Read/Write  
Bit[2] Read Only  
Bits[1:0] Read/Write  
Software Lock: Yes  
Reset Value: 0x34  
The Link Status and Control register is the general control for the transmit and receive links.  
RDSLOV Remote Descrambler Lock Override. When clear, this allows the transmitter/assembler to  
automatically send Idle cells containing the Scrambler sequence whenever the remote descrambler falls out  
of lock. This determined by either the RARDSLK bit or the RBRDSLK bit clear, depending on the Active  
receive port defined by the LBA bit. This action should force the remote descrambler back into lock. Traffic  
cells are not transmitted during this action until remote descrambler lock is achieved. If the RDSLKOV bit is  
set then the actual status of the remote descrambler (RARDSLK or RBRDSLK) is ignored and it is assumed  
that the remote descrambler is locked and therefore normal traffic cells are transmitted.  
SCDIS Transmit scrambler disable. When set the scrambler is disabled and unscrambled data is transmitted.  
When clear the scrambler is active and transmitted data is scrambled.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
57  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
CEN Coset enable. When set then the optional coset x6 + x4 + x2 + 1 is added to the generated CRC-8 used  
for the HEC. When clear the coset is not added to the HEC.  
ECCA ECC active on Port A bit. When set, this indicates to the ECC transmit section that the ETXBR bit (see  
ECC TRANSMIT BUFFER AND RECEIVE LVDS ALARMS—0x0A ETXRXA) will be set only when the far end  
ECC receiver connected to Port A indicates via the ECC signaling (received ESSA or ESSB signal, as  
selected by bit RAESS of register RACTL) over Port A that the message has been received successfully.  
When clear the ECC signaling over Port A will be ignored as the ECC Port A receiver is disabled and the  
ERABF bit will be held clear. See Embedded Communication Channel Operation.  
ECCB ECC active on Port B bit. When set, this indicates to the ECC transmit section that the ETXBR bit (see  
ECC TRANSMIT BUFFER AND RECEIVE LVDS ALARMS—0x0A ETXRXA) will be set only when the far end  
ECC receiver connected to Port B indicates via the ECC signaling (received ESSA or ESSB signal, as  
selected by bit RBESS of register RBCTL) over Port B that the message has been received successfully.  
When clear the ECC signaling over Port B will be ignored as the ECC Port B receiver is disabled and the  
ERBBF bit will be held clear. See Embedded Communication Channel Operation.  
ECCB and ECCA Note that when both these bits are clear, then the ECC transmitter and both receivers are  
inactive. The ETXBR, ETXSD, ERABF and ERBBF bits will be held clear, the ECC signaling is ignored and  
no messages are transmitted or received. See Embedded Communication Channel Operation.  
ECCB and ECCA Note that when both these bits are set, this indicates to the ECC transmit section that the  
ETXBR bit will only be set when both far end ECC receivers indicate that the transmitted message has been  
received successfully (received ESS signals). See Embedded Communication Channel Operation.  
ABSC A/B Switch completed. When switching active traffic receive port this bit can be polled by the  
processor to determine when the switch has been completed successfully. A change of the LBA bit will clear  
this bit. The ABSC bit should then be polled by the processor. The ABSC bit is set by the hardware when the  
active port switching is completed. This bit relates to the LBA active traffic switching bit and is not related to  
the ECC port switching bit ECCA and ECCB. See Switching Receive Ports.  
LBA Local receive port A or B control. When this bit is set, then Receive Port B is Active and Port A is  
Standby. When clear, then Port A is Active and Port B is Standby. This bit defines the active traffic port and  
does not affect which ECC channel is active as defined by the ECCA and ECCB bits above. See Switching  
Receive Ports.  
FTXSCR Force Transmit Scrambler Sequence. When set this forces the transmission of the scrambler  
sequence which is used to lock the descrambler.  
TRANSMIT LINK LABEL—0x09 TXLL  
Table 28. TXLL  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TXLL[7]  
TXLL[6]  
TXLL[5]  
TXLL[4]  
TXLL[3]  
TXLL[2]  
TXLL[1]  
TXLL[0]  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The Transmit Link Label register defines the contents of the Link Trace Label byte transmitted in TC6.  
TXLL[7:0] Transmitted Link Trace Label byte contents.  
58  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
ECC TRANSMIT BUFFER AND RECEIVE LVDS ALARMS—0x0A ETXRXA  
Table 29. ETXRXA  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
LLOSC  
LLOSA  
LLOSB  
ETXBR  
Type: Bits[3:1] Read only/Clear on Read  
Bit[0] Read only  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x01  
This register contains the status of the ECC transmit buffer and the LOCK signals from the two LVDS receive  
ports. When set the LLOSA, LLOSB and LLOSC bits will raise an interrupt if the corresponding interrupt enable  
bit is set.  
LLOSA Local Loss Of Signal on receive Port A. When set this will also clear all the bits in the Receive Port A  
Remote Alarms register.  
LLOSB Local Loss Of Signal on receive Port B. When set this will also clear all the bits in the Receive Port B  
Remote Alarms register.  
LLOSC Local Loss Of Signal Change. When set this indicates that there has been a change of value for  
either LLOSA or LLOSB.  
The ETXBR register bit indicates that the ECC transmit section has successfully transmitted the full ECC  
message consisting of the 8 data bytes contained in registers ETXD7–ETXD0 and a new message can be  
assembled and transmitted. This is a read only bit that the processor must examine before assembling a new  
ECC message in the ETXD7–ETXD0 data registers.  
If this bit is not set then any writes to ETXD7–ETXD0 will have no affect.  
On reset the ETXBR will be set indicating a message can be assembled for transmission. The processor  
assembles a message in the ETXD7–ETXD0 data registers. To send the message the processor simply sets the  
ETXSD register bit. This clears the ETXBR bit which prevents write access to the ETXD7–ETXD0 registers so  
that the message cannot be overwritten. When the far end ECC receiver indicates via the ECC signaling that the  
message has been received successfully, then the near end ECC transmitter ETXSD bit is cleared and the  
ETXBR bit is set. The ETXBR bit, when set, may raise a processor interrupt if the corresponding interrupt enable  
is set. The processor can therefore detect that a message has been successfully transmitted either by the  
interrupt or by polling the ETXBR bit.  
Note that the ETXBR bit cannot be cleared on a read of this register but can only be cleared by setting the  
ETXSD bit of the ETXSD register.  
ETXBR The ETXBR bit, when set, indicates that the current ECC message has been successfully transmitted  
and a new message can be assembled. If this bit is not set, then the current message has not been received  
at the far end and a new message cannot be assembled. The ETXBR bit is cleared by the setting of the  
ETXSD bit. The ETXBR bit is set either by the far end successfully receiving a message or by the processor  
clearing the ETXSD bit.  
ECC Tx BUFFER AND Rx LVDS INTERRUPT ENABLES—0x0B ETXRXIE  
Table 30. ETXRXIE  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
LLOSCIE  
LLOSAIE  
LLOSBIE  
ETXBRIE  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
This register contains the interrupt enables for the alarms in the ETXRXA register. Set = interrupt enabled and  
Clear = interrupt disabled.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
59  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
ECC TRANSMIT BUFFER SEND—0x0C ETXSD  
Table 31. ETXSD  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
ETXSD  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The ETXSD register bit controls the transmission of an ECC message.  
ETXSD The setting of the ETXSD bit initiates the transmission of the ECC message in the ETXD0–ETXD7  
data registers, but only if the ETXBR is also set. Once transmission of a message has been initiated in this  
way, it will proceed until the far end ECC receiver indicates, via the ECC signaling, that the message has  
been received successfully. The ETXSD bit will be cleared and the ETXBR register bit is set automatically  
when the far end ECC receiver indicates that the message has been received successfully. To re-send the  
same message simply set the ETXSD bit again.  
See Embedded Communication Channel Operation for a complete description of the Embedded  
Communication Channel operation.  
The processor can halt transmission of a message by clearing the ETXSD bit which sets the ETXBR bit to  
enable a new message to be constructed in the ETXD7–ETXD0 registers.  
ECC TRANSMIT BUFFER—0x0D to 0x14 ETXD7 to ETXD0  
Table 32. ETXD7–ETXD0  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ETXD7 0x0D  
ETXD6 0x0E  
ETXD5 0x0F  
ETXD4 0x10  
ETXD3 0x11  
ETXD2 0x12  
ETXD1 0x13  
ETXD0 0x14  
ETXD7[7]  
ETXD6[7]  
ETXD5[7]  
ETXD4[7]  
ETXD3[7]  
ETXD2[7]  
ETXD1[7]  
ETXD0[7]  
ETXD7[6]  
ETXD6[6]  
ETXD5[6]  
ETXD4[6]  
ETXD3[6]  
ETXD2[6]  
ETXD1[6]  
ETXD0[6]  
ETXD7[5]  
ETXD6[5]  
ETXD5[5]  
ETXD4[5]  
ETXD3[5]  
ETXD2[5]  
ETXD1[5]  
ETXD0[5]  
ETXD7[4]  
ETXD6[4]  
ETXD5[4]  
ETXD4[4]  
ETXD3[4]  
ETXD2[4]  
ETXD1[4]  
ETXD0[4]  
ETXD7[3]  
ETXD6[3]  
ETXD5[3]  
ETXD4[3]  
ETXD3[3]  
ETXD2[3]  
ETXD1[3]  
ETXD0[3]  
ETXD7[2]  
ETXD6[2]  
ETXD5[2]  
ETXD4[2]  
ETXD3[2]  
ETXD2[2]  
ETXD1[2]  
ETXD0[2]  
ETXD7[1]  
ETXD6[1]  
ETXD5[1]  
ETXD4[1]  
ETXD3[1]  
ETXD2[1]  
ETXD1[1]  
ETXD0[1]  
ETXD7[0]  
ETXD6[0]  
ETXD5[0]  
ETXD4[0]  
ETXD3[0]  
ETXD2[0]  
ETXD1[0]  
ETXD0[0]  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The ETXD7, ETXD6, ETXD5, ETXD4, ETXD3, ETXD2, ETXD1 and ETXD0 registers contain the ECC message  
to be transmitted.  
ETXD7–ETXD0 When the ETXBR bit is set, then these registers have full read/write access to allow flexible  
assembly of the ECC message before initiating transmission by setting the ETXSD bit. When the ETXBR is  
clear during message transmission, these registers are read only so that the message being transmitted  
cannot be overwritten and corrupted.  
60  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
GENERAL PURPOSE INPUT OUTPUT—0x15 GPIO  
Table 33. GPIO  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DDR[3]  
DDR[2]  
DDR[1]  
DDR[0]  
IO[3]  
IO[2]  
IO[1]  
IO[0]  
Type: Bits [7:4] Read/Write  
Bits[3:0] are Read Only when GPIO[3:0] are defined as Inputs, and Read/Write when GPIO[3:0] are  
defined as Outputs.  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0xF0  
The General Purpose Input/Output register controls the four general purpose input/output pins GPIO[3:0].  
DDR[3:0] The Data Direction bits DDR[3:0] define the function of the GPIO[3:0] pins. When a DDR bit is set  
the corresponding GPIO pin is an input and when the DDR bit is clear the corresponding GPIO pin is an  
output.  
IO[3:0] The IO bits reflect the value of the GPIO pins. When defined as an output by the DDR bit, then the IO  
bit value is driven out on the corresponding GPIO pin. When defined as an input by the DDR bit, then the IO  
bit value captures the incoming value on the corresponding GPIO pin.  
TEST ERROR CONTROL—0x16 TERRCTL  
Table 34. TERRCTL  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
EBRST[3]  
EBRST[2]  
EBRST[1]  
EBRST[0]  
ERFHEC  
ERCHEC  
ERBIP  
TXPRBS  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: Yes  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The Test Error Control register is used to control the transmission of a PRBS pattern for Bit Error Rate testing, or  
to introduce HEC and BIP errors so that the Cell Delineation, Frame Delineation, Descrambler Lock and  
performance monitoring functions can be tested. This is a test register and should not be used on live traffic. The  
exact nature of the errored HEC and BIP bytes is determined by the ERRBIP1, ERRBIP0 and ERRHEC  
registers.  
EBRST[3:0] The Error Burst bits EBRST[3:0] define the number of consecutive erred HEC’s and/or BIP’s to  
be generated and transmitted.  
ERFHEC The Error Frame HEC bit, when set, will cause EBRST consecutive Frame HEC’s to be erred.  
When this has been completed the hardware will clear this bit.  
ERCHEC The Error Cell HEC bit, when set, will cause EBRST consecutive Cell HEC’s to be erred. When this  
has been completed the hardware will clear this bit.  
ERBIP The Error BIP bit, when set, will cause EBRST consecutive BIP’s to be erred. When this has been  
completed the hardware will clear this bit.  
TXPRBS Transmit PRBS pattern. When set, the transmit section sends the raw scrambler pseudo-random  
sequence (polynomial x31 + x28 + 1). No data is transmitted. The TCS Assembler will be paused and no cells  
will be read from the FIB queue. The far end receiver can lock to this PRBS pattern to count bit errors if the  
RABEC/RBBEC bit is set in the RACTL/RBCTL register. This is not a live traffic test.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
61  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
ERROR BIP MASK—0x17 to 0x18 ERRBIP1 to ERRBIP0  
Table 35. ERRBIP1–ERRBIP0  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ERRBIP1 0x17  
ERRBIP0 0x18  
EBIP1[7]  
EBIP0[7]  
EBIP1[6]  
EBIP0[6]  
EBIP1[5]  
EBIP0[5]  
EBIP1[4]  
EBIP0[4]  
EBIP1[3]  
EBIP0[3]  
EBIP1[2]  
EBIP0[2]  
EBIP1[1]  
EBIP0[1]  
EBIP1[0]  
EBIP0[0]  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: Yes  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The Error BIP Mask registers controls how errors are introduced into the BIP bytes when bit ERBIP of the  
TERRCTL register is set. If a bit is set in the ERRBIP1 or ERRBIP0 register then the corresponding bit in the  
transmitted BIP is inverted. ERRBIP1 corresponds to the first transmitted BIP byte and ERRBIP0 corresponds to  
the second transmitted BIP byte.  
ERROR HEC MASK—0x19 ERRHEC  
Table 36. ERRHEC  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
EHEC[7]  
EHEC[6]  
EHEC[5]  
EHEC[4]  
EHEC[3]  
EHEC[2]  
EHEC[1]  
EHEC[0]  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: Yes  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The Error HEC Mask register controls the introduction of errors into the HEC byte when the ERFHEC and/or  
ERCHEC bits of the TERRCTL register are set. If a bit is set in the ERRHEC register, then the corresponding bit  
in the transmitted HEC is inverted.  
ATM AND LVDS LOOPBACK CONTROL—0x1A ALBC  
Table 37. ALBC  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
LNEN  
LNSEL  
LCLA  
LCLB  
TXLVLB  
D2ULB  
D2DLB  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The ATM and LVDS Loopback Control register controls the loopback functions of the device.  
Note that the LVDS Line and Local Loopbacks should not be on at the same time.  
LNEN LVDS Line Loopback enable. Set = ON and Clear = OFF. When set this enables the loopback of the  
LVDS receive section, determined by LNSEL, to the transmitter.  
LNSEL LVDS Line Loopback receive section select. Set = Receive B and Clear = Receive A.  
LCLA LVDS Local Loopback transmit to receive Port A. Set = ON and Clear = OFF.  
LCLB LVDS Local Loopback transmit to receive Port B. Set = ON and Clear = OFF.  
TXLVLB When set, this initiates the transmission of a single loopback cell Down Bridge on the LVDS  
transmitter. This cell will be transmitted with the MPhy address defined in the ALBMP register and will have a  
header format as defined in the ALBCF3–ALBCF0 registers. When the bit is clear, the cell has been  
transmitted. The processor sets the bit to initiate the transmission and then polls this bit to determine when  
transmission has been completed, at which time the process can be repeated to transmit another loopback  
cell. See ATM CELL LOOPBACK.  
D2ULB When set, this enables the ATM Down2Up loopback circuit. Any incoming cells from the UTOPIA  
interface which match the format of ALBCF3–ALBCF0, masked by the ALFLT3–ALFLT0 registers, are not  
62  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
stored in the FIB traffic queue but transmitted back out over the UTOPIA interface. See ATM CELL  
LOOPBACK.  
U2DLB When set, this enables the ATM Up2Down loopback circuit. Any incoming cells from the active LVDS  
receive port which match the format of ALBCF3–ALBCF0 registers, masked by the ALFLT3–ALFLT0  
registers, are not stored in the MTB traffic queue but transmitted back out over the LVDS transmitter. Note  
that although there are two independent receivers, this loopback is designed to operate on live traffic and so  
only affects cells from the active receiver as defined by the LBA bit of the LKSC register. See ATM CELL  
LOOPBACK.  
ATM LOOPBACK MPhy—0x1B ALBMP  
Table 38. ALBMP  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
LBMP[4]  
LBMP[3]  
LBMP[2]  
LBMP[1]  
LBMP[0]  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The ATM Loopback MPhy register defines the MPhy address attached to the ATM loopback cell. Setting the  
TXLVLB bit in the ALBC register initiates these loopback cells.  
LBMP[4:0] ATM loopback cell five bit MPhy address.  
ATM LOOPBACK CELL FORMAT —0x1C to 0x1F ALBCF3 to ALBCF0  
Table 39. ALBCF3–ALBCF0  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ALBCF3 0x1C  
ALBCF2 0x1D  
ALBCF1 0x1E  
ALBCF0 0x1F  
ALBCF3[7]  
ALBCF2[7]  
ALBCF1[7]  
ALBCF0[7]  
ALBCF3[6]  
ALBCF2[6]  
ALBCF1[6]  
ALBCF0[6]  
ALBCF3[5]  
ALBCF2[5]  
ALBCF1[5]  
ALBCF0[5]  
ALBCF3[4]  
ALBCF2[4]  
ALBCF1[4]  
ALBCF0[4]  
ALBCF3[3]  
ALBCF2[3]  
ALBCF1[3]  
ALBCF0[3]  
ALBCF3[2]  
ALBCF2[2]  
ALBCF1[2]  
ALBCF0[2]  
ALBCF3[1]  
ALBCF2[1]  
ALBCF1[1]  
ALBCF0[1]  
ALBCF3[0]  
ALBCF2[0]  
ALBCF1[0]  
ALBCF0[0]  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The ALBCF3, ALBCF2, ALBCF1 and ALBCF0 registers define the format of the ATM loopback cell header.  
ALBCF3[7:0] Loopback Cell header byte H1 format.  
ALBCF2[7:0] Loopback Cell header byte H2 format.  
ALBCF1[7:0] Loopback Cell header byte H3 format.  
ALBCF0[7:0] Loopback Cell header byte H4 format.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
63  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
RECEIVE PORT A LINK LABEL—0x20 RALL  
Table 40. RALL  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RALL[7]  
RALL[6]  
RALL[5]  
RALL[4]  
RALL[3]  
RALL[2]  
RALL[1]  
RALL[0]  
Type: Read only  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The Receive Port A Link Label register contains the Link Trace Label byte received in TC6 on receive Port A.  
Whenever the received link label changes value, the RALLC alarm bit in the RALA register is set, which will raise  
an interrupt if the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set.  
RALL[7:0] Port A Received Link Trace Label byte contents.  
RECEIVE PORT A EXPECTED LINK LABEL—0x21 RAELL  
Table 41. RAELL  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RAELL[7]  
RAELL[6]  
RAELL[5]  
RAELL[4]  
RAELL[3]  
RAELL[2]  
RAELL[1]  
RAELL[0]  
Type: Read only  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The Receive Port A Expected Link Label register defines the expected contents of the Link Trace Label byte  
received in TC6 on receive Port A. If the actual received value, as stored in the RALL register is not the same as  
the expected value defined here the RALLM alarm bit in the RALA register is set, which may raise a processor  
interrupt if the corresponding interrupt enable is set.  
RAELL[7:0] Port A Expected Received Link Trace Label byte contents.  
64  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
RECEIVE PORT A LOCAL ALARMS —0x22 RALA  
Table 42. RALA  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
RALLC  
RALLM  
RALCS  
RALDSLL  
RALTCLL  
RALFF  
ERABF  
Type: Bits[6:1] Read only/Clear on Read  
Bit[0] Read/Write  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The Receive Port A Local Alarms register contains information on the status of the Port A disassembler. When  
set RALLC, RALLM, RALDSLL, RALTCLL and RALFLL will raise an interrupt if the corresponding interrupt  
enable bits are set. Also a change in value on RALDSLL, RALTCLL or RALFLL will set the RALCS bit which will  
raise an interrupt if the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set.  
RALLC Receive Port A, Local Link Label Change of Status. Set = Change in RALL register value.  
RALLM Receive Port A, Local Link Label Mismatch. Set = Received link label RALL different than expected  
link label RAELL.  
RALCS Receive Port A, Local Change of Status. Set = change in value of RALDSLL, RALTCLL or RALFLL  
bits  
RALDSLL Receive Port A, Local Descrambler Loss of Lock. Set = Out of Lock and Clear = Lock.  
RALLTCLL Receive Port A, Local Transport Container Delineation Loss of Lock. Set = Out of Lock and Clear  
= Lock.  
RALFLL Receive Port A, Local Frame Delineation Loss of Lock. Set = Out of Lock and Clear = Lock.  
The ERABF register bit indicates that the ECC receive section for Port A has successfully received a full ECC  
message consisting of the 8 data bytes contained in registers ERAD7–ERAD0, and the message can now be  
read by the processor.  
On reset, the ERABF will be clear indicating no valid message has been received. When a valid message is  
received and stored in the ERAD7–ERAD0 data registers, the ERABF bit will be set and will raise an interrupt if  
the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set. Therefore, the processor can detect a received message on the  
interrupt or by polling the ERABF bit. When the processor has finished reading the message from the  
ERAD7–ERAD0 data registers and is ready to receive a new message it simply clears the ERABF bit. When a  
full message has been successfully received this is communicated to the far-end device via the ECC signaling.  
ERABF The ERABF bit, when set, indicates that ERAD7–ERAD0 data registers contain a full valid received  
message. The data in the ERAD7–ERAD0 data registers cannot be overwritten with a new received message  
while ERABF is set. When ERABF is cleared this allows the ERAD7–ERAD0 data registers to be overwritten  
with a new received message.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
65  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
RECEIVE PORT A LOCAL INTERRUPT ENABLES—0x23 RALIE  
Table 43. RALIE  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
RALLCIE  
RALLMIE  
RALCSIE  
RALDSLLI RALTCLLI RALFLLIE  
ERABFIE  
E
E
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
This register contains the interrupt enables for the alarms in the RALA register. Set = interrupt enabled and Clear  
= interrupt disabled.  
RECEIVE PORT A CONTROL—0x24 RACTL  
Table 44. RACTL  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
RAESS  
RABEC  
RADFLK  
RACDIS  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: Yes  
Reset Value: 0x01  
The Receive Port A Control register defines the operation of the Port A TCS DisAssembler section.  
RAESS Receive Port A, Valid Received ESS bit select. Two ESS bits are received in the Remote Alarm and  
Signaling Byte as described in Remote Alarm and Signaling Byte. Only one of these received bits may be  
designated as valid. The valid bit is extracted and passed to the ECC transmit section as the ECC signaling  
bit (ESS) received on Port A. When RAESS is set then the Remote Alarm and Signaling Byte bit[1], ESSB, is  
selected as valid and bit[2], ESSA is ignored. When RAESS is clear then the Remote Alarm and Signaling  
Byte bit[2], ESSA, is selected as valid and bit[1], ESSB is ignored. The names ESSA and ESSB of these bits  
refers to the remote receiver port from which they originated and are not associated with the local receivers  
Port A and Port B. See Embedded Communication Channel Operation.  
RABEC Receive Port A, Bit Error Count mode. When set the receiver expects to receive the raw scrambler  
PRBS pattern. See TXPRBS bit of the TERRCTL register. The descrambler will lock to this sequence and  
then count individual bit errors in the PRBS stream. This bit error count will be refiected in the  
RABEC2–RABEC0 registers. As there is no data cell delineation, the frame delineation will be lost. This is not  
a live traffic test.  
RADFLK Receive Port A, Descrambler Force Lock. When set the descrambler will be forced out of lock and  
will immediately begin to re-lock. The hardware will clear this bit and the descrambler lock status can be  
monitored on the RALDSLL bit of the RALA register, see RECEIVE PORT A LOCAL ALARMS —0x22 RALA.  
RACDIS Receive Port A, Cell Discard. When set then cells with an errored HEC are discarded.  
66  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
ECC RECEIVE BUFFER A—0x26 to 0x2D ERAD7 to ERAD0  
Table 45. ERAD7–ERAD0  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ERAD7 0x26  
ERAD6 0x27  
ERAD5 0x28  
ERAD4 0x29  
ERAD3 0x2A  
ERAD2 0x2B  
ERAD1 0x2C  
ERAD0 0x2D  
ERAD7[7]  
ERAD6[7]  
ERAD5[7]  
ERAD4[7]  
ERAD3[7]  
ERAD2[7]  
ERAD1[7]  
ERAD0[7]  
ERAD7[6]  
ERAD6[6]  
ERAD5[6]  
ERAD4[6]  
ERAD3[6]  
ERAD2[6]  
ERAD1[6]  
ERAD0[6]  
ERAD7[5]  
ERAD6[5]  
ERAD5[5]  
ERAD4[5]  
ERAD3[5]  
ERAD2[5]  
ERAD1[5]  
ERAD0[5]  
ERAD7[4]  
ERAD6[4]  
ERAD5[4]  
ERAD4[4]  
ERAD3[4]  
ERAD2[4]  
ERAD1[4]  
ERAD0[4]  
ERAD7[3]  
ERAD6[3]  
ERAD5[3]  
ERAD4[3]  
ERAD3[3]  
ERAD2[3]  
ERAD1[3]  
ERAD0[3]  
ERAD7[2]  
ERAD6[2]  
ERAD5[2]  
ERAD4[2]  
ERAD3[2]  
ERAD2[2]  
ERAD1[2]  
ERAD0[2]  
ERAD7[1]  
ERAD6[1]  
ERAD5[1]  
ERAD4[1]  
ERAD3[1]  
ERAD2[1]  
ERAD1[1]  
ERAD0[1]  
ERAD7[0]  
ERAD6[0]  
ERAD5[0]  
ERAD4[0]  
ERAD3[0]  
ERAD2[0]  
ERAD1[0]  
ERAD0[0]  
Type: Read only  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The ERAD7, ERAD6, ERAD5, ERAD4, ERAD3, ERAD2, ERAD1 and ERAD0 registers contain the Port A  
received ECC message.  
ERAD7–ERAD0 When the ERABF bit is set then these registers contain a valid received ECC message for  
Port A and cannot be overwritten by any incoming messages. When the ERABF bit is clear these registers  
may not contain a valid message and should not be interpreted as such.  
RECEIVE PORT A HEC COUNT—0x2E to 0x30 RAHECC2 to RAHECC0  
Table 46. RAHECC2–RAHECC0  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RAHECC2  
0x2E  
RAHECC2[7] RAHECC2[6] RAHECC2[5] RAHECC2[4] RAHECC2[3] RAHECC2[2] RAHECC2[1] RAHECC2[0]  
RAHECC1[7] RAHECC1[6] RAHECC1[5] RAHECC1[4] RAHECC1[3] RAHECC1[2] RAHECC1[1] RAHECC1[0]  
RAHECC0[7] RAHECC0[6] RAHECC0[5] RAHECC0[4] RAHECC0[3] RAHECC0[2] RAHECC0[1] RAHECC0[0]  
RAHECC1  
0x2F  
RAHECC0  
0x30  
Type: Read only/Clear on Read  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The RAHECC2, RAHECC1 and RAHECC0 registers contain the Port A received errored HEC count.  
RAHECC2–RAHECC0 This register must be read in the order of most significant byte RAHECC2 first and  
least significant byte RAHECC0 last or the value read will not be valid. This counter will not roll-over from  
0xFFFFFF to 0x000000 but will stick at 0xFFFFFF.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
67  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
RECEIVE PORT A HEC THRESHOLD—0x31 to 0x33 RAHECT2 to RAHECT0  
Table 47. RAHECT2–RAHECT0  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RAHECT2  
0x31  
RAHECT2[7] RAHECT2[6] RAHECT2[5] RAHECT2[4] RAHECT2[3] RAHECT2[2] RAHECT2[1] RAHECT2[0]  
RAHECT1[7] RAHECT1[6] RAHECT1[5] RAHECT1[4] RAHECT1[3] RAHECT1[2] RAHECT1[1] RAHECT1[0]  
RAHECT0[7] RAHECT0[6] RAHECT0[5] RAHECT0[4] RAHECT0[3] RAHECT0[2] RAHECT0[1] RAHECT0[0]  
RAHECT1  
0x32  
RAHECT0  
0x33  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0xFF  
The RAHECT2, RAHECT1 and RAHECT0 registers contain the Port A received erred HEC threshold. When the  
error count RAHECC equals the threshold RAHECT then the RAXHEC alarm will be set.  
These registers should not be set to all zeroes.  
RAHECT2–RAHECT0 Most significant byte RAHECT2 and least significant byte RAHECT0.  
RECEIVE PORT A BIP COUNT—0x34 to 0x36 RABIPC2 to RABIPC0  
Table 48. RABIPC2–RABIPC0  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RABIPC2  
0x34  
RABIPC2[7]  
RABIPC2[6]  
RABIPC2[5]  
RABIPC2[4]  
RABIPC2[3]  
RABIPC2[2]  
RABIPC2[1]  
RABIPC2[0]  
RABIPC1  
0x35  
RABIPC1[7]  
RABIPC0[7]  
RABIPC1[6]  
RABIPC0[6]  
RABIPC1[5]  
RABIPC0[5]  
RABIPC1[4]  
RABIPC0[4]  
RABIPC1[3]  
RABIPC0[3]  
RABIPC1[2]  
RABIPC0[2]  
RABIPC1[1]  
RABIPC0[1]  
RABIPC1[0]  
RABIPC0[0]  
RABIPC0  
0x36  
Type: Read only/Clear on Read  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The RABIPC2, RABIPC1 and RABIPC0 registers contain the Port A received errored BIP count.  
RABIPC2–RABIPC0 This register must be read in the order of most significant byte RABIPC2 first and least  
significant byte RABIPC0 last or the value read will not be valid. This counter will not roll-over from 0xFFFFFF  
to 0x000000 but will stick at 0xFFFFFF.  
68  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
RECEIVE PORT A BIP THRESHOLD—0x36 to 0x39 RABIPT2 to RABIPT0  
Table 49. RABIPT2–RABIPT0  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RABIPT2  
0x37  
RABIPT2[7]  
RABIPT2[6]  
RABIPT2[5]  
RABIPT2[4]  
RABIPT2[3]  
RABIPT2[2]  
RABIPT2[1]  
RABIPT2[0]  
RABIPT1  
0x38  
RABIPT1[7]  
RABIPT0[7]  
RABIPT1[6]  
RABIPT0[6]  
RABIPT1[5]  
RABIPT0[5]  
RABIPT1[4]  
RABIPT0[4]  
RABIPT1[3]  
RABIPT0[3]  
RABIPT1[2]  
RABIPT0[2]  
RABIPT1[1]  
RABIPT0[1]  
RABIPT1[0]  
RABIPT0[0]  
RABIPT0  
0x39  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0xFF  
The RABIPT2, RABIPT1 and RABIPT0 registers contain the Port A received errored BIP threshold. When the  
error count RABIPC equals the threshold RABIPT then the RAXBIP alarm will be set.  
These registers should not be set to all zeroes.  
RABIPT2–RABIPT0 Most significant byte RABIPT2 and least significant byte RABIPT0.  
RECEIVE PORT A PERFORMANCE ALARMS—0x3A RAPA  
Table 50. RAPA  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
RAXHEC  
RAXBIP  
Type: Read only/Clear on Read  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The Receive Port A Performance Alarms register contains information about the error performance of Port A.  
When set RAXHEC and RAXBIP will raise an interrupt if the corresponding interrupt enable bits are set.  
RAXHEC Receive Port A, Excessive HEC Errors. Set = Number of HEC errors counted in RAHECC is equal  
to or greater than the threshold set in RAHECT. This bit is set when RAHECC = RAHECT and can only be  
cleared by a read of this register.  
RAXBIP Receive Port A, Excessive BIP Errors. Set = Number of BIP errors counted in RABIPC is equal to or  
greater than the threshold set in RABIPT. This bit is set when RABIPC = RABIPT and can only be cleared by  
a read of this register.  
RECEIVE PORT A PERFORMANCE INTERRUPT ENABLES—0x3B RAPIE  
Table 51. RAPIE  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved RAXHECIE RAXBIPIE  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
This register contains the interrupt enables for the alarms in the RAPA register. Set = interrupt enabled and Clear  
= interrupt disabled.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
69  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
RECEIVE PORT A REMOTE STATUS AND ALARMS—0x3C RARA  
Table 52. RARA  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
RARCS  
RARLOSA RARLOSB  
RARBA  
RARDSLL  
Type: Bits[4:2] and [0] Read only/Clear on Read  
Bit[1] Read only  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x0D  
The Receive Port A Remote Status and Alarms register contains information on the status of the far-end device,  
which is connected to Port A. On a local Loss of Signal on Port A, LLOSA alarm, these bits return to their reset  
values. When set, the RARLOSA, RARLOSB, RARBA, and RARDSLL bits will raise an interrupt if the  
corresponding interrupt enable is set. Also, a change in value on RARLOSA, RARLOSB, RARDSLL or RARBA  
will set the RARCS bit. When set, the RARCS bit will raise an interrupt if the corresponding interrupt enable is  
set.  
RARCS Receive Port A, Remote Change of Status at far end device LVDS receive Ports.  
RARLOSA Receive Port A, Remote Loss Of Signal at far end device LVDS receive Port A.  
RARLOSB Receive Port A, Remote Loss Of Signal at far end device LVDS receive Port B.  
RARBA Receive Port A, Remote far end device active receive Port. Set = Port B active and Clear = Port A  
active. Note that this bit, if set, will not clear on a read of this register.  
RARDSLL Receive Port A, Remote far end device active receive port Descrambler Loss of Lock. Set = Out of  
Lock and Clear = Lock.  
RECEIVE PORT A REMOTE INTERRUPT ENABLES—0x3D RARIE  
Table 53. RARIE  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
RARCSIE RARLOSA RARLOSBI  
IE  
RARBAIE RARDSLLI  
E
E
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
This register contains the interrupt enables for the alarms in the RARA register. Set = interrupt enabled and Clear  
= interrupt disabled.  
70  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
RECEIVE PORT A UP2DOWN LOOPBACK CELL COUNT—0x3E RAU2DLBC  
Table 54. RAU2DLBC  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RAU2DLBC[7] RAU2DLBC[6] RAU2DLBC[5] RAU2DLBC[4]  
RAU2DLBC[3]  
RAU2DLBC[2]  
RAU2DLBC[1]  
RARECEIVE  
PORT B HEC  
THRESHOLDU2  
DLBC[0]  
Type: Read only/Clear on Read  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The Receive Port A Up2Down Loopback Cell Count register counts the number of incoming loopback cells  
detected from the Port A LVDS interface when Up2Down loopback is enabled with the U2DLB bit of the ALBC  
register, see ATM AND LVDS LOOPBACK CONTROL—0x1A ALBC. Note that this counter is incremented when  
an incoming loopback cell is received and that this differs from the functionality of the Down2Up Loopback Cell  
Count register, see ATM DOWN2UP LOOPBACK CELL COUNT—0xE0 D2ULBCC.  
RAU2DLBC[7:0] Port A Up2Down Loopback Cell Count value. This register will not roll-over from 0x00 to  
0xFF but will stick at 0xFF.  
RECEIVE PORT A CELL DELINEATION THRESHOLDS—0x40 RACDT  
Table 55. RACDT  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ALPHA[3]  
ALPHA[2]  
ALPHA[1]  
ALPHA[0]  
DELTA[3]  
DELTA[2]  
DELTA[1]  
DELTA[0]  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: Yes  
Reset Value: 0x78  
The Receive Port A Cell and Transport Container Delineation Thresholds register controls the operation of the  
Port A cell delineation state machine. The cell delineation lock status is reflected in the RALTCLL bit of the RALA  
register.  
ALPHA[3:0] When in lock this is the number of consecutive incorrect cell HEC’s required to lose cell  
delineation lock.  
DELTA[3:0] When out of lock this is the number of consecutive correct cell HEC’s required to gain cell  
delineation lock.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
71  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
RECEIVE PORT A FRAME DELINEATION THRESHOLDS—0x41 RAFDT  
Table 56. RAFDT  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MU[3]  
MU[2]  
MU[1]  
MU[0]  
SIGMA[3]  
SIGMA[2]  
SIGMA[1]  
SIGMA[0]  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: Yes  
Reset Value: 0x78  
The Receive Port A Frame Delineation Thresholds register controls the operation of the Port A frame delineation  
state machine. The frame delineation lock status is refiected in the RALFLL bit of the RALA register.  
MU[3:0] When in lock this is the number of consecutive incorrect cell HEC’s required to lose frame  
delineation lock.  
SIGMA[3:0] When out of lock this is the number of consecutive correct frame HEC’s required to gain frame  
delineation lock.  
RECEIVE PORT A DESCRAMBLER LOCK THRESHOLDS—0x42 RADSLKT  
Table 57. RADSLKT  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PSI[3]  
PSI[2]  
PSI[1]  
PSI[0]  
RHO[3]  
RHO[2]  
RHO[1]  
RHO[0]  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: Yes  
Reset Value: 0x88  
The Receive Port A Descrambler Lock Thresholds register controls the operation of the Port A descrambler lock  
state machine confidence counter. The descrambler lock status is reflected in the RALDSLL bit of the RALA  
register.  
PSI[3:0] When in lock this is the threshold that the descrambler confidence counter must reach to lose  
descrambler lock. When in lock the descrambler confidence counter increments on incorrect HEC predictions  
and decrements on good HEC predictions.  
RHO[3:0] When out of lock this is the threshold that the descrambler confidence counter must reach to gain  
descrambler lock. When out of lock the descrambler confidence counter decrements on incorrect HEC  
predictions and increments on good HEC predictions.  
72  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
RECEIVE PORT A BIT ERROR COUNT—0x43 to 0x45 RABEC2 to RABEC0  
Table 58. RABEC2–RABEC0  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RABEC2  
0x43  
RABEC2[7]  
RABEC2[6]  
RABEC2[5]  
RABEC2[4]  
RABEC2[3]  
RABEC2[2]  
RABEC2[1]  
RABEC2[0]  
RABEC1  
0x44  
RABEC1[7]  
RABEC0[7]  
RABEC1[6]  
RABEC0[6]  
RABEC1[5]  
RABEC0[5]  
RABEC1[4]  
RABEC0[4]  
RABEC1[3]  
RABEC0[3]  
RABEC1[2]  
RABEC0[2]  
RABEC1[1]  
RABEC0[1]  
RABEC1[0]  
RABEC0[0]  
RABEC0  
0x45  
Type: Read only/Clear on Read  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The RABEC2, RABEC1 and RABEC0 registers contain the Port A received bit error count whenever the RABEC  
bit of the RACTL register is set. If the RABEC bit of the RACTL register is clear these registers are cleared.  
RABEC2–RABEC0 This register must be read in the order of most significant byte RABEC2 first and least  
significant byte RABEC0 last, or the value read will not be valid. This counter will not roll-over from 0xFFFFFF  
to 0x000000 but will stick at 0xFFFFFF.  
RECEIVE PORT B LINK LABEL—0x60 RBLL  
Table 59. RBLL  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RBLL[7]  
RBLL[6]  
RBLL[5]  
RBLL[4]  
RBLL[3]  
RBLL[2]  
RBLL[1]  
RBLL[0]  
Type: Read only  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The Receive Port B Link Label register contains the Link Trace Label byte received in TC6 on receive Port B.  
Whenever the received link label changes value, the RBLLC alarm bit in the RBLA register is set, which will raise  
an interrupt if the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set.  
RBLL[7:0] Port B Received Link Trace Label byte contents.  
RECEIVE PORT B EXPECTED LINK LABEL—0x61 RBELL  
Table 60. RBELL  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RBELL[7]  
RBELL[6]  
RBELL[5]  
RBELL[4]  
RBELL[3]  
RBELL[2]  
RBELL[1]  
RBELL[0]  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The Receive Port B Expected Link Label register defines the expected contents of the Link Trace Label byte  
received in TC6 on receive Port B. If the actual received value, as stored in the RBLL register is not the same as  
the expected value defined here the RBLLM alarm bit in the RBLA register is set, which may raise a processor  
interrupt if the corresponding interrupt enable is set.  
RBELL[7:0] Port B Expected Received Link Trace Label byte contents.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
73  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
RECEIVE PORT B LOCAL ALARMS—0x62 RBLA  
Table 61. RBLA  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
RBLLC  
RBLLM  
RBLCS  
RBLDSLL  
RBLTCLL  
RBLFLL  
ERBBF  
Type: Bits[6:1] Read only/Clear on Read  
Bit[0] Read/Write  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The Receive Port B Local Alarms register contains information on the status of the Port B disassembler. When  
set, RBLLC, RBLLM, RBLDSLL, RBLTCLL, and RBLFLL will raise an interrupt if the corresponding interrupt  
enable bits are set. Also, a change in value on RBLDSLL, RBLTCLL and RBLFLL will set the RBLCS bit, which  
will raise an interrupt if the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set.  
RBLLC Receive Port B, Local Link Label Change of Status. Set = Change in RBLL register value.  
RBLLM Receive Port B, Local Link Label Mismatch. Set = Received link label RBLL different than expected  
link label RBELL.  
RBLCS Receive Port B, Local Change of Status. Set = change in value of RBLDSLL, RBLTCLL or RBLFLL  
bits.  
RBLDSLL Receive Port B, Local Descrambler Loss of Lock. Set = Out of Lock and Clear = Lock.  
RBLTCLL Receive Port B, Local Transport Container Delineation Loss of Lock. Set = Out of Lock and Clear  
= Lock.  
RBLFLL Receive Port B, Local Frame Delineation Loss of Lock. Set = Out of Lock and Clear = Lock.  
The ERBBF register bit indicates that the ECC receive section for Port B has successfully received a full ECC  
message consisting of the 8 data bytes contained in registers ERBD7–ERBD0 and a the message can now be  
read by the processor.  
On reset, the ERBBF will be clear indicating no valid message has been received. When a valid message is  
received and stored in the ERBD7–ERBD0 data registers, the ERBBF bit will be set and will raise an interrupt if  
the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set. Therefore, the processor can detect a received message on the  
interrupt or by polling the ERBBF bit. When the processor has finished reading the message from the  
ERBD7–ERBD0 data registers and is ready to receive a new message, it simply clears the ERBBF bit. When a  
full message has been successfully received, this is communicated to the far-end device via the ECC signaling.  
ERBBF The ERBBF bit, when set, indicates that ERBD7–ERBD0 data registers contain a full valid received  
message. The data in the ERBD7–ERBD0 data registers cannot be overwritten with a new received message  
while ERBBF is set. When ERBBF is cleared, this allows the ERBD7–ERBD0 data registers to be overwritten  
with a new received message.  
RECEIVE PORT B LOCAL INTERRUPT ENABLES—0x63 RBLIE  
Table 62. RBLIE  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
RBLLCIE  
RBLLMIE  
RBLCSIE  
RBLSLLIE RBLTCLLI RBLFLLIE  
E
ERBBFIE  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
This register contains the interrupt enables for the alarms in the RBLA register. Set = interrupt enabled and Clear  
= interrupt disabled.  
74  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
RECEIVE PORT B CONTROL—0x64 RBCTL  
Table 63. RBCTL  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
RBESS  
RBBEC  
RBDFLK  
RBCDIS  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: Yes  
Reset Value: 0x01  
The Receive Port B Control register defines the operation of the Port B TCS DisAssembler section.  
RBESS Receive Port B, Valid Received ESS bit select. Two ESS bits are received in the Remote Alarm and  
Signaling Byte as described in Remote Alarm and Signaling Byte. Only one of these received bits may be  
designated as valid. The valid bit is extracted and passed to the ECC transmit section as the ECC signaling  
bit (ESS) received on Port B. When RBESS is set, then the Remote Alarm and Signaling Byte bit[1], ESSB, is  
selected as valid and bit[2], ESSA is ignored. When RBESS is clear then the Remote Alarm and Signaling  
Byte bit[2], ESSA, is selected as valid and bit[1], ESSB is ignored. The names ESSA and ESSB of these bits  
refers to the remote receiver port from which they originated and are not associated with the local receivers  
Port A and Port B. See Embedded Communication Channel Operation.  
RBBEC Receive Port B, Bit Error Count mode. When set the receiver expects to receive the raw scrambler  
PRBS pattern. See TXPRBS bit of the TERRCTL register. The descrambler will lock to this sequence and  
then count individual bit errors in the PRBS stream. This bit error count will be refiected in the  
RBBEC2–RBBEC0 registers. As there is no data cell delineation, the frame delineation will be lost. This is not  
a live traffic test.  
RBDFLK Receive Port B, Descrambler Force Lock. When set the descrambler will be forced out of lock and  
will immediately begin to re-lock. The hardware will clear this bit and the descrambler lock status can be  
monitored on the RBLDSLL bit of the RBLA register, see RECEIVE PORT B LOCAL ALARMS—0x62 RBLA.  
RBCDIS Receive Port B, Cell Discard. When set then cells with an errored HEC are discarded.  
ECC RECEIVE BUFFER B—0x66 to 0x6D ERBD7 to ERBD0  
Table 64. ERBD7–ERBD0  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ERBD7 0x66  
ERBD6 0x67  
ERBD5 0x68  
ERBD4 0x69  
ERBD3 0x6A  
ERBD2 0x6B  
ERBD1 0x6C  
ERBD0 0x6D  
ERBD7[7]  
ERBD6[7]  
ERBD5[7]  
ERBD4[7]  
ERBD3[7]  
ERBD2[7]  
ERBD1[7]  
ERBD0[7]  
ERBD7[6]  
ERBD6[6]  
ERBD5[6]  
ERBD4[6]  
ERBD3[6]  
ERBD2[6]  
ERBD1[6]  
ERBD0[6]  
ERBD7[5]  
ERBD6[5]  
ERBD5[5]  
ERBD4[5]  
ERBD3[5]  
ERBD2[5]  
ERBD1[5]  
ERBD0[5]  
ERBD7[4]  
ERBD6[4]  
ERBD5[4]  
ERBD4[4]  
ERBD3[4]  
ERBD2[4]  
ERBD1[4]  
ERBD0[4]  
ERBD7[3]  
ERBD6[3]  
ERBD5[3]  
ERBD4[3]  
ERBD3[3]  
ERBD2[3]  
ERBD1[3]  
ERBD0[3]  
ERBD7[2]  
ERBD6[2]  
ERBD5[2]  
ERBD4[2]  
ERBD3[2]  
ERBD2[2]  
ERBD1[2]  
ERBD0[2]  
ERBD7[1]  
ERBD6[1]  
ERBD5[1]  
ERBD4[1]  
ERBD3[1]  
ERBD2[1]  
ERBD1[1]  
ERBD0[1]  
ERBD7[0]  
ERBD6[0]  
ERBD5[0]  
ERBD4[0]  
ERBD3[0]  
ERBD2[0]  
ERBD1[0]  
ERBD0[0]  
Type: Read only  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The ERBD7, ERBD6, ERBD5, ERBD4, ERBD3, ERBD2, ERBD1, and ERBD0 registers contain the Port B  
received ECC message.  
ERBD7–ERBD0 When the ERBBF bit is set, then these registers contain a valid received ECC message for  
Port B and cannot be overwritten by any incoming messages. When the ERBBF bit is clear, these registers  
may not contain a valid message and should not be interpreted as such.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
75  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
RECEIVE PORT B HEC COUNT—0x6E to 0x70 RBHECC2 to RBHECC0  
Table 65. RBHECC2–RBHECC0  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RBHECC2  
0x6E  
RBHECC2[7] RBHECC2[6] RBHECC2[5] RBHECC2[4] RBHECC2[3] RBHECC2[2] RBHECC2[1] RBHECC2[0]  
RBHECC1[7] RBHECC1[6] RBHECC1[5] RBHECC1[4] RBHECC1[3] RBHECC1[2] RBHECC1[1] RBHECC1[0]  
RBHECC0[7] RBHECC0[6] RBHECC0[5] RBHECC0[4] RBHECC0[3] RBHECC0[2] RBHECC0[1] RBHECC0[0]  
RBHECC1  
0x6F  
RBHECC0  
0x70  
Type: Read only/Clear on Read  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The RBHECC2, RBHECC1 and RBHECC0 registers contain the Port B received errored HEC count.  
RBHECC2–RBHECC0 This register must be read in the order of most significant byte RBHECC2 first and  
least significant byte RBHECC0 or the value read will not be valid. This counter will not roll-over from  
0xFFFFFF to 0x000000 but will stick at 0xFFFFFF.  
RECEIVE PORT B HEC THRESHOLD—0x71 to 0x73 RBHECT2 to RBHECT0  
Table 66. RBHECT2–RBHECT0  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RBHECT2  
0x71  
RBHECT2[7] RBHECT2[6] RBHECT2[5] RBHECT2[4] RBHECT2[3] RBHECT2[2] RBHECT2[1] RBHECT2[0]  
RBHECT1[7] RBHECT1[6] RBHECT1[5] RBHECT1[4] RBHECT1[3] RBHECT1[2] RBHECT1[1] RBHECT1[0]  
RBHECT0[7] RBHECT0[6] RBHECT0[5] RBHECT0[4] RBHECT0[3] RBHECT0[2] RBHECT0[1] RBHECT0[0]  
RBHECT1  
0x72  
RBHECT0  
0x73  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0xFF  
The RBHECT2, RBHECT1 and RBHECT0 registers contain the Port B received erred HEC threshold. When the  
error count RBHECC equals the threshold RBHECT, then the RBXHEC alarm will be set.  
These registers should not be set to all zeroes.  
RBHECT2–RBHECT0 Most significant byte RBHECT2 and least significant byte RBHECT0.  
76  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
RECEIVE PORT B BIP COUNT—0x74 to 0x76 RBBIPC2 to RBBIPC0  
Table 67. RBBIPC2–RBBIPC0  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RBBIPC2  
0x74  
RBBIPC2[7]  
RBBIPC2[6]  
RBBIPC2[5]  
RBBIPC2[4]  
RBBIPC2[3]  
RBBIPC2[2]  
RBBIPC2[1]  
RBBIPC2[0]  
RBBIPC1  
0x75  
RBBIPC1[7]  
RBBIPC0[7]  
RBBIPC1[6]  
RBBIPC0[6]  
RBBIPC1[5]  
RBBIPC0[5]  
RBBIPC1[4]  
RBBIPC0[4]  
RBBIPC1[3]  
RBBIPC0[3]  
RBBIPC1[2]  
RBBIPC0[2]  
RBBIPC1[1]  
RBBIPC0[1]  
RBBIPC1[0]  
RBBIPC0[0]  
RBBIPC0  
0x76  
Type: Read only/Clear on Read  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The RBBIPC2, RBBIPC1 and RBBIPC0 registers contain the Port B received errored BIP count.  
RBBIPC2–RBBIPC0 This register must be read in the order of most significant byte RBBIPC2first and least  
significant byte RBBIPC0 or the value read will not be valid. This counter will not roll-over from 0xFFFFFF to  
0x000000 but will stick at 0xFFFFFF.  
RECEIVE PORT B BIP THRESHOLD—0x77 to 0x79 RBBIPT2 to RBBIPT0  
Table 68. RBBIPT2–RBBIPT0  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RBBIPT2  
0x77  
RBBIPT2[7]  
RBBIPT2[6]  
RBBIPT2[5]  
RBBIPT2[4]  
RBBIPT2[3]  
RBBIPT2[2]  
RBBIPT2[1]  
RBBIPT2[0]  
RBBIPT1  
0x78  
RBBIPT1[7]  
RBBIPT0[7]  
RBBIPT1[6]  
RBBIPT0[6]  
RBBIPT1[5]  
RBBIPT0[5]  
RBBIPT1[4]  
RBBIPT0[4]  
RBBIPT1[3]  
RBBIPT0[3]  
RBBIPT1[2]  
RBBIPT0[2]  
RBBIPT1[1]  
RBBIPT0[1]  
RBBIPT1[0]  
RBBIPT0[0]  
RBBIPT0  
0x79  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0xFF  
The RBBIPT2, RBBIPT1 and RBBIPT0 registers contain the Port B received erred BIP threshold. When the error  
count RBBIPC equals the threshold RBBIPT, then the RBXBIP alarm will be set.  
These registers should not be set to all zeroes.  
RBBIPT2–RBBIPT0 Most significant byte RBBIPT2 and least significant byte RBBIPT0.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
77  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
RECEIVE PORT B PERFORMANCE ALARMS—0x7A RBPA  
Table 69. RBPA  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
RBXHEC  
RBXBIP  
Type: Read only/Clear on Read  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The Receive Port B Performance Alarms register contains information about the error performance of Port B.  
When set RBXHEC and RBXBIP will raise an interrupt if the corresponding interrupt enable bits are set.  
RBXHEC Receive Port B, Excessive HEC Errors. Set = Number of HEC errors counted in RBHECC is equal  
to or greater than the threshold set in RBHECT. This bit is set when RBHECC = RBHECT and can only be  
cleared by a read of this register.  
RBXBIP Receive Port B, Excessive BIP Errors. Set = Number of BIP errors counted in RBBIPC is equal to or  
greater than the threshold set in RBBIPT. This bit is set when RBBIPC = RBBIPT and can only be cleared by  
a read of this register.  
RECEIVE PORT B PERFORMANCE INTERRUPT ENABLES—0x7B RBPIE  
Table 70. RBPIE  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved RBXHECIE RBXBIPIE  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
This register contains the interrupt enables for the alarms in the RBPA register. Set = interrupt enabled and Clear  
= interrupt disabled.  
78  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
RECEIVE PORT B REMOTE STATUS AND ALARMS—0x7C RBRA  
Table 71. RBRA  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
RBRCS  
RBRLOSA RBRLOSB  
RBRBA  
RBRDSLL  
Type: Bits[4:2] and [0] Read only/Clear on Read  
Bit[1] Read only  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x0D  
The Receive Port B Remote Status and Alarms register contains information on the status of the far-end device,  
which is connected to Port B. On a local Loss of Signal on Port B, LLOSB alarm, these bits return to their reset  
values. When set, the RBRLOSA, RBRLOSB, RBRBA, and RBRDSLL bits will raise an interrupt if the  
corresponding interrupt enable is set. Also, a change in value on RBRLOSA, RBRLOSB, RBRDSLL or RBRBA  
will set the RBRCS bit. When set, the RBRCS bit will raise an interrupt if the corresponding interrupt enable is  
set.  
RBRCS Receive Port B, Remote Change of Status at far end device LVDS receive Ports.  
RBRLOSA Receive Port B, Remote Loss Of Signal at far end device LVDS receive Port A.  
RBRLOSB Receive Port B, Remote Loss Of Signal at far end device LVDS receive Port B.  
RBRBA Receive Port B, Remote far end device active receive Port. Set = Port B active and Clear = Port A  
active. Note that this bit, if set, will not clear on a read of this register.  
RBRDSLL Receive Port B, Remote far end device active receive port Descrambler Loss of Lock. Set = Out of  
Lock and Clear = Lock.  
RECEIVE PORT B REMOTE INTERRUPT ENABLES—0x7D RBRIE  
Table 72. RBRIE  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved Reserved Reserved  
RBRCSIE RBRLOSAI RBRLOSBI RBRBAIE  
RBRDSLLIE  
E
E
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
This register contains the interrupt enables for the alarms in the RBRB register. Set = interrupt enabled and Clear  
= interrupt disabled.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
79  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
RECEIVE PORT B UP2DOWN LOOPBACK CELL COUNT—0x7E RBU2DLBC  
Table 73. RBU2DLBC  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RBU2DLB RBU2DLB RBU2DLB RBU2DLB RBU2DLB RBU2DLB RBU2DLB RBU2DLB  
C[7] C[6] C[5] C[4] C[3] C[2] C[1] C[0]  
Type: Read only/Clear on Read  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The Receive Port B Up2Down Loopback Cell Count register counts the number of incoming loopback cells  
detected from the Port B LVDS interface when Up2Down loopback is enabled with the U2DLB bit of the ALBC  
register, see ATM AND LVDS LOOPBACK CONTROL—0x1A ALBC. Note that this counter is incremented when  
an incoming loopback cell is received and that this differs from the functionality of the Down2Up Loopback Cell  
Count register, see ATM DOWN2UP LOOPBACK CELL COUNT—0xE0 D2ULBCC.  
RBU2DLBC[7:0] Port B Up2Down Loopback Cell Count value. This register will not roll-over from 0x00 to  
0xFF but will stick at 0xFF.  
RECEIVE PORT B CELL DELINEATION THRESHOLDS—0x80 RBCDT  
Table 74. RBCDT  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ALPHA[3]  
ALPHA[2]  
ALPHA[1]  
ALPHA[0]  
DELTA[3]  
DELTA[2]  
DELTA[1]  
DELTA[0]  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: Yes  
Reset Value: 0x78  
The Receive Port B Cell and Transport Container Delineation Thresholds register controls the operation of the  
Port B cell delineation state machine. The cell delineation lock status is refiected in the RBLTCLL bit of the RBLA  
register.  
ALPHA[3:0] When in lock this is the number of consecutive incorrect cell HEC’s required to lose cell  
delineation lock.  
DELTA[3:0] When out of lock this is the number of consecutive correct cell HEC’s required to gain cell  
delineation lock.  
RECEIVE PORT B FRAME DELINEATION THRESHOLDS—0x81 RBFDT  
Table 75. RBFDT  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MU[3]  
MU[2]  
MU[1]  
MU[0]  
SIGMA[3]  
SIGMA[2]  
SIGMA[1]  
SIGMA[0]  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: Yes  
Reset Value: 0x78  
The Receive Port B Frame Delineation Thresholds register controls the operation of the Port B frame delineation  
state machine. The frame delineation lock status is refiected in the RBLFLL bit of the RBLA register.  
MU[3:0] When in lock this is the number of consecutive incorrect cell HEC’s required to lose frame  
delineation lock.  
SIGMA[3:0] When out of lock this is the number of consecutive correct frame HEC’s required to gain frame  
delineation lock.  
80  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
RECEIVE PORT B DESCRAMBLER LOCK THRESHOLDS—0x82 RBDSLKT  
Table 76. RBDSLKT  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PSI[3]  
PSI[2]  
PSI[1]  
PSI[0]  
RHO[3]  
RHO[2]  
RHO[1]  
RHO[0]  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: Yes  
Reset Value: 0x88  
The Receive Port B Descrambler Lock Thresholds register controls the operation of the Port B descrambler lock  
state machine confidence counter. The descrambler lock status is refiected in the RBLDSLL bit of the RBLA  
register.  
PSI[3:0] When in lock this is the threshold that the descrambler confidence counter must reach to lose  
descrambler lock. When in lock the descrambler confidence counter increments on incorrect HEC predictions  
and decrements on good HEC predictions.  
RHO[3:0] When out of lock this is the threshold that the descrambler confidence counter must reach to gain  
descrambler lock. When out of lock the descrambler confidence counter decrements on incorrect HEC  
predictions and increments on good HEC predictions.  
RECEIVE PORT B BIT ERROR COUNT—0x83 to 0x85 RBBEC2 to RBBEC0  
Table 77. RBBEC2–RBBEC0  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RBBEC2  
0x83  
RBBEC2[7]  
RBBEC2[6]  
RBBEC2[5]  
RBBEC2[4]  
RBBEC2[3]  
RBBEC2[2]  
RBBEC2[1]  
RBBEC2[0]  
RBBEC1  
0x84  
RBBEC1[7]  
RBBEC0[7]  
RBBEC1[6]  
RBBEC0[6]  
RBBEC1[5]  
RBBEC0[5]  
RBBEC1[4]  
RBBEC0[4]  
RBBEC1[3]  
RBBEC0[3]  
RBBEC1[2]  
RBBEC0[2]  
RBBEC1[1]  
RBBEC0[1]  
RBBEC1[0]  
RBBEC0[0]  
RBBEC0  
0x85  
Type: Read only/Clear on Read  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The RBBEC2, RBBEC1 and RBBEC0 registers contain the Port B received bit error count whenever the RBBEC  
bit of the RBCTL register is set. If the RBBEC bit of the RBCTL register is clear, these registers are cleared.  
RBBEC2–RBBEC0 This register must be read in the order of most significant byte RBBEC2 first and least  
significant byte RBBEC0 last, or the value read will not be valid. This counter will not roll-over from 0xFFFFFF  
to 0x000000 but will stick at 0xFFFFFF.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
81  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
UTOPIA CONFIGURATION—0xA0 UCFG  
Table 78. UCFG  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
Reserved  
CLVM[1]  
CLVM[0]  
BWIDTH  
Reserved  
UBDEN  
UMODE  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: Yes  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The UTOPIA Configuration register defines the UTOPIA interface operating modes. The default is ATM Layer  
Level 2 mode (31 ports) using CLAV0 with16 bit data.  
CLVM[1:0] Clav Mode bits. 00 = Up to 31 ports using CLAV0, 01 or 10 = Reserved, 11 = Up to 248 ports  
using CLAV0 to CLAV7.  
BWIDTH UTOPIA data bus width. Set = 8-bit data bus and Clear = 16-bit mode.  
UBDEN UTOPIA Bidirectional pins enable. Set = the UTOPIA bidirectional pins take on the functionality as  
defined by the UMODE setting. Clear = All UTOPIA interface bidirectional pins are tri-stated. This is to avoid  
pin contention at the UTOPIA pins on reset.  
UMODE UTOPIA ATM or PHY mode. Set = PHY Layer interface and Clear = ATM Layer Interface.  
UTOPIA CONNECTED PORT LIST—0xA1 to 0xA4 UCPL3 to UCPL0  
Table 79. UCPL1–UCPL0  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
UCPL3 0xA1  
UCPL2 0xA2  
UCPL1 0xA3  
UCPL0 0xA4  
Reserved  
UCPL2[7]  
UCPL1[7]  
UCPL0[7]  
UCPL3[6]  
UCPL2[6]  
UCPL1[6]  
UCPL0[6]  
UCPL3[5]  
UCPL2[5]  
UCPL1[5]  
UCPL0[5]  
UCPL3[4]  
UCPL2[4]  
UCPL1[4]  
UCPL0[4]  
UCPL3[3]  
UCPL2[3]  
UCPL1[3]  
UCPL0[3]  
UCPL3[2]  
UCPL2[2]  
UCPL1[2]  
UCPL0[2]  
UCPL3[1]  
UCPL2[1]  
UCPL1[1]  
UCPL0[1]  
UCPL3[0]  
UCPL2[0]  
UCPL1[0]  
UCPL0[0]  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: Yes  
Reset Value: 0xFF, except UCPL3 = 0x7F  
The UCPL3, UCPL2, UCPL1 and UCPL0 registers define the connected UTOPIA ports for polling. The sub-ports  
present for the connected ports is defined in the UCSPL register. Note that at least one port has to be connected  
for correct polling to occur, so these registers should never be set to all zeroes. See UTOPIA Interface  
Operation. If no ports are required then use of the Configuration Traffic inhibit functionality is recommended. See  
Configuration and Traffic Inhibit Operation.  
UCPL3–UCPL0 UCPL3[6] corresponds to port 31 and UCPL0[0] corresponds to port 0. When a bit is set then  
the port is connected and will be polled, when clear the port is not connected and will not be polled.  
82  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
UTOPIA CONNECTED SUB-PORT LIST—0xA6 UCSPL  
Table 80. UCSPL  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
UCSPL[7]  
UCSPL[6]  
UCSPL[5]  
UCSPL[4]  
UCSPL[3]  
UCSPL[2]  
UCSPL[1]  
UCSPL[0]  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: Yes  
Reset Value: 0x01  
The UCSPL register defines the connected UTOPIA sub-ports within all ports for polling.  
UCSPL UCSPL[7] corresponds to sub-port 7 (CLAV7) and UCSPL[0] corresponds to sub-port 0 (CLAV0).  
When a bit is set, then the sub-port is connected and will be polled; when clear, the sub-port is not connected  
and will not be polled.  
UTOPIA SUB-PORT ADDRESS LOCATION—0xA7 USPAL  
Table 81. USPAL  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
USPL[4]  
USPL[3]  
USPL[2]  
USPL[1]  
USPL[0]  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: Yes  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The UTOPIA Sub-Port Address Location register defines which byte of the PDU header the sub-port address is  
contained in when using Extended UTOPIA mode. The PDU header consists of the User Prepend, the ATM cell  
header and UDF bytes, and so can be a maximum of 18 bytes. The first of these bytes is denoted as byte 0. The  
corresponding USPAM register is used to define which bits in the byte contain the sub-port address.  
USPAL[4:0] Byte number of the PDU header byte which contains the UTOPIA sub-port address.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
83  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
UTOPIA SUB-PORT ADDRESS MASK—0xA8 USPAM  
Table 82. USPAM  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
USPAM[7] USPAM[6] USPAM[5] USPAM[4] USPAM[3] USPAM[2] USPAM[1] USPAM[0]  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: Yes  
Reset Value: 0x07  
The UTOPIA Sub-Port Address Mask register defines which bits of the PDU header byte defined by the USPAL  
register contain the sub-port address.  
USPAM[7:0] Set = This bit location contains valid sub-port address bit.Clear = Ignore this bit location.  
Note that only 3 bit locations must be set in this register to give the 3 bit sub-port address location. All other bits  
must be clear. By default, bits USPAM[2:0] are set, indicating that the sub-port address is located in bits [2:0] of  
the PDU header byte indicated by the USPAL register, with the MSB in bit [2] and the LSB in bit [0]. If USPAM  
bits [6], [4] and [1] were set, then the sub-port address would be located in bits [6], [4] and [1] of the PDU header  
byte indicated by the USPAL register, with the MSB in bit [6] and the LSB in bit [1].  
MTB QUEUE THRESHOLD—0xA9 to 0xC7 MTBQT30 to MTBQT0  
Table 83. MTBQT30–MTBQT0  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MTBQT30  
0xA9  
MTBQT30[7] MTBQT30[6] MTBQT30[5] MTBQT30[4] MTBQT30[3] MTBQT30[2] MTBQT30[1] MTBQT30[0]  
MTBQT29  
0xAA  
MTBQT29[7] MTBQT29[6] MTBQT29[5] MTBQT29[4] MTBQT29[3] MTBQT29[2] MTBQT29[1] MTBQT29[0]  
MTBQT2  
0xC5  
MTBQT2[7]  
MTBQT1[7]  
MTBQT0[7]  
MTBQT2[6]  
MTBQT1[6]  
MTBQT0[6]  
MTBQT2[5]  
MTBQT1[5]  
MTBQT0[5]  
MTBQT2[4]  
MTBQT1[4]  
MTBQT0[4]  
MTBQT2[3]  
MTBQT1[3]  
MTBQT0[3]  
MTBQT2[2]  
MTBQT1[2]  
MTBQT0[2]  
MTBQT2[1]  
MTBQT1[1]  
MTBQT0[1]  
MTBQT2[0]  
MTBQT1[0]  
MTBQT0[0]  
MTBQT1  
0xC6  
MTBQT0  
0xC7  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: Yes  
Reset Value: 0x04  
The MTB Queue Threshold registers define the maximum size, in PDU cells, of each of the 31 queues. If all 31  
queues are being used, it is recommended that the threshold be left at the default of 4 cells. If less than 31  
queues are in use, then the queue threshold may be raised according to SINGLE BRIDGE MTB  
CONFIGURATION.  
MTBQT30[7:0] Maximum number of PDU cells for queue 30.  
MTBQT29[7:0] Maximum number of PDU cells for queue 29.  
...................  
MTBQT1[7:0] Maximum number of PDU cells for queue 1.  
MTBQT0[7:0] Maximum number of PDU cells for queue 0.  
84  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
MTB QUEUE FULL—0xC8 to 0xCB MTBQFL3 to MTBQFL0  
Table 84. MTBQFL3–MTBQFL0  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MTBQFL3  
0xC8  
MTBQFL3[7] MTBQFL3[6] MTBQFL3[5] MTBQFL3[4] MTBQFL3[3] MTBQFL3[2] MTBQFL3[1] MTBQFL3[0]  
MTBQFL2[7] MTBQFL2[6] MTBQFL2[5] MTBQFL2[4] MTBQFL2[3] MTBQFL2[2] MTBQFL2[1] MTBQFL2[0]  
MTBQFL1[7] MTBQFL1[6] MTBQFL1[5] MTBQFL1[4] MTBQFL1[3] MTBQFL1[2] MTBQFL1[1] MTBQFL1[0]  
MTBQFL0[7] MTBQFL0[6] MTBQFL0[5] MTBQFL0[4] MTBQFL0[3] MTBQFL0[2] MTBQFL0[1] MTBQFL0[0]  
MTBQT29  
0xC9  
MTBQFL1  
0xCA  
MTBQFL0  
0xCB  
Type: Read only  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The MTBQFL3, MTBQFL2, MTBQFL1 and MTBQFL0 registers show which queues are full.  
MTBQFL3[7] MTBQFL3[7] bit indicates that the entire MTB is full. As memory resources are over assigned  
among the 31 individual queues then the MTB may be full while some of the individual queues may not be  
full. When this bit is set, then the entire queue is full and when clear, the queue is not full.  
MTBQFL3–MTBQFL0 MTBQFL3[6] corresponds to queue 31 and MTBQFL0[0] corresponds to queue 0.  
When a bit is set, then the queue is full and when clear, the queue is not full.  
MTB QUEUE EMPTY—0xCC to 0xCF MTBQE3 to MTBQE0  
Table 85. MTBQE3–MTBQE0  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MTBQE3  
0xCC  
Reserved  
MTBQE3[6]  
MTBQE3[5]  
MTBQE3[4]  
MTBQE3[3]  
MTBQE3[2]  
MTBQE3[1]  
MTBQE3[0]  
MTBQT29  
0xCD  
MTBQE2[7]  
MTBQE1[7]  
MTBQE0[7]  
MTBQE2[6]  
MTBQE1[6]  
MTBQE0[6]  
MTBQE2[5]  
MTBQE1[5]  
MTBQE0[5]  
MTBQE2[4]  
MTBQE1[4]  
MTBQE0[4]  
MTBQE2[3]  
MTBQE1[3]  
MTBQE0[3]  
MTBQE2[2]  
MTBQE1[2]  
MTBQE0[2]  
MTBQE2[1]  
MTBQE1[1]  
MTBQE0[1]  
MTBQE2[0]  
MTBQE1[0]  
MTBQE0[0]  
MTBQE1  
0xCE  
MTBQE0  
0xCF  
Type: Read only  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0xFF, except MTBQE3 = 0x7F  
The MTBQE3, MTBQE2, MTBQE1 and MTBQE0 registers show which queues are empty.  
MTBQE3–MTBQE0 MTBQE3[6] corresponds to queue 31 and MTBQE0[0] corresponds to queue 0. When a  
bit is set, then the queue is empty and when clear, the queue is not empty.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
85  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
MTB QUEUE FLUSH—0xD0 to 0xD3 MTBQF3 to MTBQF0  
Table 86. MTBQF3–MTBQF0  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MTBQF3  
0xD0  
Reserved  
MTBQF3[6]  
MTBQF3[5]  
MTBQF3[4]  
MTBQF3[3]  
MTBQF3[2]  
MTBQF3[1]  
MTBQF3[0]  
MTBQF2  
0xD1  
MTBQF2[7]  
MTBQF1[7]  
MTBQF0[7]  
MTBQF2[6]  
MTBQF1[6]  
MTBQF0[6]  
MTBQF2[5]  
MTBQF1[5]  
MTBQF0[5]  
MTBQF2[4]  
MTBQF1[4]  
MTBQF0[4]  
MTBQF2[3]  
MTBQF1[3]  
MTBQF0[3]  
MTBQF2[2]  
MTBQF1[2]  
MTBQF0[2]  
MTBQF2[1]  
MTBQF1[1]  
MTBQF0[1]  
MTBQF2[0]  
MTBQF1[0]  
MTBQF0[0]  
MTBQF1  
0xD2  
MTBQF0  
0xD3  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: Yes  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The MTBQF3, MTBQF2, MTBQF1 and MTBQF0 registers allow each of the queues to be flushed. Flushing a  
queue removes all PDU cells from the queue. The processor sets the appropriate bit in the MTBQF register to  
flush a queue. When this has been completed, the hardware will clear the bit. So after setting a bit to flush a  
queue, the processor should poll the MTBQF register to determine when the flushing has been completed.  
MTBQF3–MTBQF0 MTBQF3[6] corresponds to queue 31 and MTBQF0[0] corresponds to queue 0. When a  
bit is set, then a flush of the corresponding queue is initiated and when the queue flush is completed and the  
queue is now in normal operation.  
MTB CELL FLUSH—0xD4 to 0xD7 MTBCF3 to MTBCF0  
Table 87. MTBCF3–MTBCF0  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MTBCF3  
0xD4  
Reserved  
MTBCF3[6]  
MTBCF3[5]  
MTBCF3[4]  
MTBCF3[3]  
MTBCF3[2]  
MTBCF3[1]  
MTBCF3[0]  
MTBCF2  
0xD5  
MTBCF2[7]  
MTBCF1[7]  
MTBCF0[7]  
MTBCF2[6]  
MTBCF1[6]  
MTBCF0[6]  
MTBCF2[5]  
MTBCF1[5]  
MTBCF0[5]  
MTBCF2[4]  
MTBCF1[4]  
MTBCF0[4]  
MTBCF2[3]  
MTBCF1[3]  
MTBCF0[3]  
MTBCF2[2]  
MTBCF1[2]  
MTBCF0[2]  
MTBCF2[1]  
MTBCF1[1]  
MTBCF0[1]  
MTBCF2[0]  
MTBCF1[0]  
MTBCF0[0]  
MTBCF1  
0xD6  
MTBCF0  
0xD7  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: Yes  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The MTBCF3, MTBCF2, MTBCF1 and MTBCF0 registers allow the PDU cell at the head of each of the queues  
to be flushed. This removes the PDU cell from the head of the queue without corrupting the queue. The  
processor sets the appropriate bit in the MTBCF register to flush a cell from a queue. When this has been  
completed, the hardware will clear the bit. So after setting a bit to flush a cell from a queue, the processor should  
poll the MTBCF register to determine when the flush has been completed.  
MTBCF3–MTBCF0 MTBCF3[6] corresponds to queue 31 and MTBCF0[0] corresponds to queue 0. When a  
bit is set, then a flush of the PDU cell at the head of the queue is initiated and when clear, the cell flush is  
completed and the queue is now in normal operation.  
86  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
QUEUE FLUSH—0xD8 QFL  
Table 88. QFL  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
FIBFL  
MTBFL  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: Yes  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The Queue Flush register allows both the MTB and the FIB queues to be completely flushed. This removes all  
PDU cells from either the MTB or FIB queue. The processor sets the appropriate bit in the QFL register to flush a  
queue. When this has been completed, the hardware will clear the bit. So after setting a bit to flush a queue the  
processor should poll the QFL register to determine when the flush has been completed.  
FIBFL When set, then a flush of the FIB queue is initiated and when clear, the FIB queue flush is completed  
and the queue is now in normal operation.  
MTBFL When set, then a flush of the MTB queue is initiated and when clear, the MTB queue flush is  
completed and the queue is now in normal operation.  
MTB QUEUE OVERFLOW—0xD9 to 0xDC MTBQOV3 to MTBQOV0  
Table 89. MTBQOV3–MTBQOV0  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MTBQOV3  
0xD9  
Reserved  
MTBQOV3[6] MTBQOV3[5] MTBQOV3[4] MTBQOV3[3] MTBQOV3[2] MTBQOV3[1] MTBQOV3[0]  
MTBQT29  
0xDA  
MTBQOV2[7] MTBQOV2[6] MTBQOV2[5] MTBQOV2[4] MTBQOV2[3] MTBQOV2[2] MTBQOV2[1] MTBQOV2[0]  
MTBQOV1[7] MTBQOV1[6] MTBQOV1[5] MTBQOV1[4] MTBQOV1[3] MTBQOV1[2] MTBQOV1[1] MTBQOV1[0]  
MTBQOV0[7] MTBQOV0[6] MTBQOV0[5] MTBQOV0[4] MTBQOV0[3] MTBQOV0[2] MTBQOV0[1] MTBQOV0[0]  
MTBQOV1  
0xDB  
MTBQOV0  
0xDC  
Type: Read only/Clear on Read  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The MTBQOV3, MTBQOV2, MTBQOV1 and MTBQOV0 registers indicate the overflow status of the thirty-one  
queues in the MTB. If a queue has filled to its threshold defined in the MTBQT31–MTBQT0 registers, and an  
attempt is made to write another cell to the queue, then the overflow bit for that queue will be set in these  
registers. These bits reflect that an attempt has been made to write to an already full queue and may be used as  
an indication of problems with the Flow Control mechanism. Up to seven additional cells will be accepted into the  
queue before a hard overflow occurs. Once the threshold value plus seven cells has been exceeded any  
additional cells will be rejected and discarded automatically. A subsequent read of a cell from the specific queue  
out over the Utopia interface will be successful, and will clear the overflow bit in this register once the number of  
cells in the queue is below the threshold. If any bit in the MTBQOV3–MTBQOV0 registers is set then the  
MTBSOVA bit of the UAA register will be set and may raise an interrupt.  
MTBQOV3–MTBQOV0 MTBQOV3[6] corresponds to queue 31 and MTBQOV0[0] corresponds to queue 0.  
When a bit is set, then there was an attempt to overflow the corresponding queue.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
87  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
ATM DOWN2UP LOOPBACK CELL COUNT—0xE0 D2ULBCC  
Table 90. D2ULBCC  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
D2ULBCC D2ULBCC D2ULBCC D2ULBCC D2ULBCC D2ULBCC D2ULBCC D2ULBCC  
[7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1] [0]  
Type: Read only/Clear on Read  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The ATM Down2Up Loopback Cell Count register counts the number of outgoing loopback cells detected on the  
UTOPIA interface when Down2Up loopback is enabled with the D2ULB bit of the ALBC register, see ATM AND  
LVDS LOOPBACK CONTROL—0x1A ALBC. Note that this counter is only incremented when a loopback cell is  
read out of the device.  
D2ULBCC[7:0] Down2Up Loopback Cell Count value. This register will not roll-over from 0x00 to 0xFF but  
will stick at 0xFF.  
UTOPIA AND ATM ALARMS—0xE1 UAA  
Table 91. UAA  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PDULA  
CTFRA  
D2ULBC  
U2DLBC  
UPRTY  
FIBOVA  
MTBSOVA MTBHOVA  
Type: Read only/Clear on Read  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
The UTOPIA and ATM Alarms register monitors the UTOPIA interface, loopbacks and queue overflows. When  
set these bits will raise an interrupt if the corresponding interrupt enables are set.  
PDULA PDU Length Alarm bit. Set = PDU length as defined by the PDUCFG register is greater than the  
maximum PDU cell length of 64 bytes. Clear = PDU length is less than or equal to maximum of 64 bytes.  
CTFRA Cell Transfer Alarm bit. This alarm is only valid when the device is configured as a PHY layer by  
setting the UMODE bit of the UCFG register. It indicates that the controlling ATM layer device has caused an  
incorrect cell transfer to or from the DS92UT16. An incorrect cell transfer can only occur when a suspended  
cell transfer is restarted with an different MPhy address than initially selected. Set = Incorrect cell transfer has  
occurred on the UTOPIA transmit or receive interface.  
D2ULBC Set = D2ULBCC count register has changed value.  
U2DLBC Set = RAU2DLBC or RBU2DLBC count registers have changed value.  
UPRTY Set = A parity error has occurred on an incoming ATM cell byte.  
FIBOV Set = FIB queue attempted to overflow (Equivalent functionality as the MTBQOV3–0 register bits).  
MTBSOV MTB Soft Overflow Alarm bit. Set = One or more of the bits in the MTBQOV3–MTBQOV0 registers  
are set. Clear = The MTBQOV3–MTBQOV0 registers are clear.  
MTBHOV MTB Hard Overflow Alarm bit. Set = MTB queue has attempted to overflow. This is a hard overflow  
as the overall MTB has attempted to fill beyond it’s hard limit of 159 cells.  
88  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
UTOPIA AND ATM INTERRUPT ENABLES—0xE2 UAIE  
Table 92. UAIE  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PDULIE  
CTFRIE  
D2ULBCIE U2DLBCIE  
UPRTYIE  
FIBOVIE MTBSOVAI MTBHOVIE  
E
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0x00  
This register contains the interrupt enables for the alarms in the UAA register. Set = interrupt enabled and Clear  
= interrupt disabled.  
ATM LOOPBACK CELL FILTER—0xF7 to 0xFA ALFLT3 to AFLT0  
Table 93. ALFLT3–ALFLT0  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ALFLT3 0xF7  
ALFLT2 0xF8  
ALFLT1 0xF9  
ALFLT0 0xFA  
ALFLT3[7]  
ALFLT2[7]  
ALFLT1[7]  
ALFLT0[7]  
ALFLT3[6]  
ALFLT2[6]  
ALFLT1[6]  
ALFLT0[6]  
ALFLT3[5]  
ALFLT2[5]  
ALFLT1[5]  
ALFLT0[5]  
ALFLT3[4]  
ALFLT2[4]  
ALFLT1[4]  
ALFLT0[4]  
ALFLT3[3]  
ALFLT2[3]  
ALFLT1[3]  
ALFLT0[3]  
ALFLT3[2]  
ALFLT2[2]  
ALFLT1[2]  
ALFLT0[2]  
ALFLT3[1]  
ALFLT2[1]  
ALFLT1[1]  
ALFLT0[1]  
ALFLT3[0]  
ALFLT2[0]  
ALFLT1[0]  
ALFLT0[0]  
Type: Read/Write  
Software Lock: No  
Reset Value: 0xFF  
The ALBCF3, ALBCF2, ALBCF1 and ALBCF0 registers (see Table 39) define the cell header bytes filter for  
detecting ATM loopback cells. Incoming ATM cells are compared against the loopback cell header format defined  
in the ALBCF3–ALBCF0 registers to determine if they are loopback cells. The filter defined in the  
ALFLT3–ALFLT0 registers is used to determine which bits of the four byte cell header are compared. If a bit is  
set then that bit in the incoming cell header is compared against the corresponding bit in the ALBCF3–ALBCF0  
registers. Only those bits which are set in the ALFLT3–ALFLT0 registers are compared to determine if a cell is a  
loopback cell.  
ALBCF3[7:0] Loopback Cell header byte H1 filter.  
ALBCF2[7:0] Loopback Cell header byte H2 filter.  
ALBCF1[7:0] Loopback Cell header byte H3 filter.  
ALBCF0[7:0] Loopback Cell header byte H4 filter.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
89  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
Test Features  
www.ti.com  
TEST STRUCTURES  
The DS92UT16 device has the following test structures in place.  
Internal SCAN (manufacturing test only)  
RAM BIST (manufacturing test only)  
Boundary SCAN  
As shown, the device has a AP controller which was generated using the LOGICVISION tool suite. This AP  
controller is used to configure the device for scan testing, RAM BIST and Boundary Scan. The Instruction  
Register is shown in Figure 23. Bits 12–18 are not used. A more detailed description of the operation of the TAP  
controller can be found in the LOGICVISION document: Adding Logic Test—A Hardware Reference July 2000.  
NOTE  
The Internal SCAN and RAM BIST functions are not user accessible. Therefore, the  
device user should never assert the Test_se pin  
Figure 23. LOGICVISION TAP Instruction Register  
The TAP controller contains a device ID register which holds the device identification. Figure 24 shows the  
makeup of the device ID register and the device ID value for the DS92UT16 device.  
DEVICE ID = 0FC2801F  
Figure 24. Device Identification Register  
90  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
BOUNDARY SCAN  
The DS92UT16 device contains boundary scan (BS) cells on all inputs, outputs, bi-directs, and direction control  
signals. There are no boundary scan cells on any of the inputs or outputs from the pins to the LVDS Interface  
block. The boundary scan order is shown in Table 94 along with the type and controlling BS cell for bidirectional  
BS cells. For bidirectional pins, if the controlling cell is a logic ‘1’ then they are outputs.  
Table 94. Boundary Scan Order  
No.  
1
Pin Name  
RBPWDN  
Type  
INPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
OUTPUT  
ENABLE  
BIDIR  
Ctrl.  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
12  
2
TXADEN  
3
TXBDEN  
4
TPWDN  
5
TXSYNC  
6
TXCLK  
7
CPU_BUSMODE  
CPU_CS_N  
CPU_RD_N  
CPU_WR_N  
CPU_INT_N  
CPU_DATA_TRI  
CPU_DATA_7  
CPU_DATA_6  
CPU_DATA_5  
CPU_DATA_4  
CPU_DATA_3  
CPU_DATA_2  
CPU_DATA_1  
CPU_DATA_0  
CPU_ADDR_7  
CPU_ADDR_6  
CPU_ADDR_5  
CPU_ADDR_4  
CPU_ADDR_3  
CPU_ADDR_2  
CPU_ADDR_1  
CPU_ADDR_0  
GPIO_TRI_3  
GPIO_3  
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
BIDIR  
12  
BIDIR  
12  
BIDIR  
12  
BIDIR  
12  
BIDIR  
12  
BIDIR  
12  
BIDIR  
12  
INPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
ENABLE  
BIDIR  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
29  
GPIO_TRI_2  
GPIO_2  
ENABLE  
BIDIR  
N/A  
31  
GPIO_TRI_1  
GPIO_1  
ENABLE  
BIDIR  
N/A  
33  
GPIO_TRI_0  
GPIO_0  
ENABLE  
BIDIR  
N/A  
35  
RESET_N  
INPUT  
ENABLE  
BIDIR  
N/A  
N/A  
38  
UTFC_MODE  
U_TXDATA_15  
U_TXDATA_14  
U_TXDATA_13  
U_TXDATA_12  
BIDIR  
38  
BIDIR  
38  
BIDIR  
38  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
91  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
Table 94. Boundary Scan Order (continued)  
No.  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
Pin Name  
U_TXDATA_11  
U_TXDATA_10  
U_TXDATA_9  
U_TXDATA_8  
U_TXDATA_7  
U_TXDATA_6  
U_TXDATA_5  
U_TXDATA_4  
U_TXDATA_3  
U_TXDATA_2  
U_TXDATA_1  
U_TXDATA_0  
U_TXPARITY  
U_TXCLAV_6  
U_TXCLAV_5  
U_TXCLAV_4  
U_TXCLAV_3  
U_TXCLAV_2  
U_TXCLAV_1  
U_TXCLAV_0  
U_TXCLAV_L_TRI  
U_TXCLAV_L  
U_TXENB_6  
Type  
BIDIR  
Ctrl.  
38  
BIDIR  
38  
BIDIR  
38  
BIDIR  
38  
BIDIR  
38  
BIDIR  
38  
BIDIR  
38  
BIDIR  
38  
BIDIR  
38  
BIDIR  
38  
BIDIR  
38  
BIDIR  
38  
BIDIR  
38  
INPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
ENABLE  
BIDIR  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
63  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
INPUT  
BIDIR  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
38  
U_TXENB_5  
U_TXENB_4  
U_TXENB_3  
U_TXENB_2  
U_TXENB_1  
U_TXENB_0  
UDB_CLK  
U_TXENB_L  
U_TXSOC  
BIDIR  
38  
U_TXADDR_4  
U_TXADDR_3  
U_TXADDR_2  
U_TXADDR_1  
U_TXADDR_0  
U_RXDATA_TRI  
U_RXDATA_15  
U_RXDATA_14  
U_RXDATA_13  
U_RXDATA_12  
U_RXDATA_11  
U_RXDATA_10  
U_RXDATA_9  
U_RXDATA_8  
U_RXDATA_7  
BIDIR  
38  
BIDIR  
38  
BIDIR  
38  
BIDIR  
38  
BIDIR  
38  
ENABLE  
BIDIR  
N/A  
80  
BIDIR  
80  
BIDIR  
80  
BIDIR  
80  
BIDIR  
80  
BIDIR  
80  
BIDIR  
80  
BIDIR  
80  
BIDIR  
80  
92  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
Table 94. Boundary Scan Order (continued)  
No.  
90  
Pin Name  
U_RXDATA_6  
U_RXDATA_5  
U_RXDATA_4  
U_RXDATA_3  
U_RXDATA_2  
U_RXDATA_1  
U_RXDATA_0  
U_RXOSC  
Type  
BIDIR  
Ctrl.  
80  
91  
BIDIR  
80  
92  
BIDIR  
80  
93  
BIDIR  
80  
94  
BIDIR  
80  
95  
BIDIR  
80  
96  
BIDIR  
80  
97  
BIDIR  
80  
98  
U_RXENB_U_6  
U_RXENB_U_5  
U_RXENB_U_4  
UUB_CLK  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
INPUT  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
OUTPUT  
BIDIR  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
38  
99  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
111  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
118  
119  
120  
121  
122  
123  
U_RXENB_U_3  
U_RXENB_U_2  
U_RXENB_U_1  
U_RXENB_U_0  
U_RXENB_L  
U_RXCLAV_U_6  
U_RXCLAV_U_5  
U_RXCLAV_U_4  
U_RXCLAV_U_3  
U_RXCLAV_U_2  
U_RXCLAV_U_1  
U_RXCLAV_U_0  
U_RXCLAV_L_TRI  
U_RXCLAV_L  
U_RXPARITY  
U_RXADDR_4  
U_RXADDR_3  
U_RXADDR_2  
U_RXADDR_1  
U_RXADDR_0  
TEST_SE  
INPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
ENABLE  
BIDIR  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
114  
80  
BIDIR  
BIDIR  
38  
BIDIR  
38  
BIDIR  
38  
BIDIR  
38  
BIDIR  
38  
INPUT  
INPUT  
N/A  
N/A  
RAPWDN  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
93  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
Package  
196-ball LBGA. Dimensions 15 x 15 x 1.37 mm, 1.0 mm ball pitch.  
Table 95. Pin Locations—BGA196 Package  
Ball  
Pin Name  
Signal Type  
GND  
Description  
A2  
AGND  
AGND  
AGND  
AGND  
AGND  
AGND  
AGND  
AGND  
AVDD  
Analog GND for LVDS I/O  
Analog GND for LVDS I/O  
Analog GND for LVDS I/O  
Analog GND for LVDS I/O  
Analog GND for LVDS I/O  
Analog GND for LVDS I/O  
Analog GND for LVDS I/O  
Analog GND for LVDS I/O  
Analog VDD for LVDS I/O  
Analog VDD for LVDS I/O  
Analog VDD for LVDS I/O  
Analog VDD for LVDS I/O  
Analog VDD for LVDS I/O  
Analog VDD for LVDS I/O  
Address Bus  
A12  
B11  
B13  
C4  
C7  
C13  
E7  
B3  
B4  
B12  
B14  
C10  
D7  
J2  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
3.3V  
AVDD  
3.3V  
AVDD  
3.3V  
AVDD  
3.3V  
AVDD  
3.3V  
AVDD  
3.3V  
CPU_Addr[0]  
CPU_Addr[1]  
CPU_Addr[2]  
CPU_Addr[3]  
CPU_Addr[4]  
CPU_Addr[5]  
CPU_Addr[6]  
CPU_Addr[7]  
CPU_BusMode  
CPU_cs  
Input LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
Output LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
GND  
J3  
Address Bus  
J1  
Address Bus  
H2  
H1  
G1  
F1  
Address Bus  
Address Bus  
Address Bus  
Address Bus  
E1  
E6  
E5  
J4  
Address Bus  
Mode Select for CPU Bus Protocol  
Select Signal to Validate the Address Bus for R/W Transfers  
CPU_Data[0]  
CPU_Data[1]  
CPU_Data[2]  
CPU_Data[3]  
CPU_Data[4]  
CPU_Data[5]  
CPU_Data[6]  
CPU_Data[7]  
CPU_int  
Data Bus  
H3  
F2  
Data Bus  
Data Bus  
H4  
F3  
Data Bus  
Data Bus  
G3  
G4  
E2  
F4  
Data Bus  
Data Bus  
Data Bus  
Interrupt Request Line  
E3  
F5  
CPU_rd (CPU_ds)  
CPU_wr (CPU_rnw)  
DGND  
Read or Data Strobe, Depending on CPU_BusMode  
Write or Read/Write, Depending on CPU_BusMode  
B7  
C2  
D11  
E11  
F6  
Digital GND  
Digital GND  
Digital GND  
Digital GND  
Digital GND  
Digital GND  
Digital GND  
Digital GND  
Digital GND  
DGND  
GND  
DGND  
GND  
DGND  
GND  
DGND  
GND  
F9  
DGND  
GND  
G5  
H7  
H8  
DGND  
GND  
DGND  
GND  
DGND  
GND  
94  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
Table 95. Pin Locations—BGA196 Package (continued)  
Ball  
H9  
Pin Name  
Signal Type  
GND  
Description  
DGND  
Digital GND  
Digital GND  
Digital GND  
Digital GND  
VDD for Core Logic  
VDD for Core Logic  
VDD for Core Logic  
Digital VDD  
K14  
L1  
DGND  
GND  
DGND  
GND  
N8  
DGND  
GND  
K1  
DVDD25  
DVDD25  
DVDD25  
DVDD33  
DVDD33  
DVDD33  
DVDD33  
DVDD33  
DVDD33  
DVDD33  
DVDD33  
DVDD33  
DVDD33  
DVDD33  
2.5V  
K13  
P10  
A1  
2.5V  
2.5V  
3.3V  
A11  
D10  
F7  
3.3V  
Digital VDD  
3.3V  
Digital VDD  
3.3V  
Digital VDD  
F8  
3.3V  
Digital VDD  
G2  
3.3V  
Digital VDD  
G6  
3.3V  
Digital VDD  
G7  
3.3V  
Digital VDD  
G14  
J7  
3.3V  
Digital VDD  
3.3V  
Digital VDD  
J11  
H6  
3.3V  
Digital VDD  
GPIO [0]  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Output LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Diff. Input  
Diff. Input  
Diff. Output  
Diff. Output  
Output LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Output LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Diff. Input  
Diff. Input  
Diff. Output  
Diff. Output  
Output LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Output LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
General Purpose Input and Output  
General Purpose Input and Output  
General Purpose Input and Output  
General Purpose Input and Output  
Boundary Scan Test Clock  
H5  
GPIO [1]  
K2  
GPIO [2]  
J6  
GPIO [3]  
E9  
JTAG_CLK  
E8  
JTAG_Reset  
JTAG_TDI  
Boundary Scan Test Circuit Reset  
Boundary Scan Test Data In  
F12  
E13  
E10  
C1  
JTAG_TDO  
Boundary Scan Test Data Out  
Boundary Scan Test Mode Select  
Driver Enable for Transmit A  
JTAG_TMS  
LVDS_ADen  
LVDS_ADin[]  
LVDS_ADin[+]  
LVDS_ADout[]  
LVDS_ADout[+]  
LVDS_ALock_n  
LVDS_APwdn  
LVDS_ARefClk  
LVDS_ARxClk  
LVDS_BDen  
LVDS_BDin[]  
LVDS_BDin[+]  
LVDS_BDout[]  
LVDS_BDout[+]  
LVDS_BLock_n  
LVDS_BPwdn  
LVDS_BRefClk  
LVDS_BRxClk  
LVDS_Synch  
LVDS_TxClk  
A14  
A13  
A9  
Input for Receiver Port A  
Input for Receiver Port A  
Output for Driver A  
A10  
C14  
E14  
B10  
D14  
D2  
Output for Driver A  
Lock Signal from Receive Port A  
Receive Port A and Deserializer Power Down  
Reference Clock for Receiver A PLL  
Recovered Clock Output from Receive Port A  
Driver Enable for Transmit B  
A3  
Input for Receive Port B  
A4  
Input for Receive Port B  
A6  
Output for Driver B  
A7  
Output for Driver B  
C3  
Lock Signal from Receive Port B  
Receive Port B and Deserializer Power Down  
Reference Clock for Receiver B PLL  
Recovered Clock Output from Receive Port B  
Force SYNC patterns on Transmit A and B  
Reference Clock for Driving Transmission Function  
B1  
D4  
B2  
E4  
D1  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
95  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
Table 95. Pin Locations—BGA196 Package (continued)  
Ball  
Pin Name  
LVDS_TxPwdn  
Signal Type  
Input LVTTL  
Description  
D3  
G8  
J8  
Powerdown for LVDS Serializer  
NO CONNECT  
NC  
NC  
NO CONNECT  
K8  
B8  
C8  
D8  
C9  
NC  
NO CONNECT  
PGND  
GND  
GND for Transmit PLL  
GND for Transmit PLL  
GND for Transmit PLL  
GND for PLL A  
PGND  
GND  
PGND  
GND  
PGNDA  
GND  
C11  
C12  
G9  
PGNDA  
GND  
GND for PLL A  
PGNDA  
GND  
GND for PLL A  
PGNDA  
GND  
GND for PLL A  
B5  
PGNDB  
GND  
GND for PLL B  
B6  
PGNDB  
GND  
GND for PLL B  
C5  
PGNDB  
GND  
GND for PLL B  
C6  
PGNDB  
GND  
GND for PLL B  
A8  
PVDD  
3.3V  
Transmit PLL VDD  
Transmit PLL VDD  
VDD for PLL A  
B9  
PVDD  
3.3V  
D9  
PVDDA  
3.3V  
D12  
E12  
A5  
PVDDA  
3.3V  
VDD for PLL A  
PVDDA  
3.3V  
VDD for PLL A  
PVDDB  
3.3V  
VDD for PLL B  
D5  
PVDDB  
3.3V  
VDD for PLL B  
D6  
PVDDB  
3.3V  
VDD for PLL B  
L2  
Reset_n  
Input LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
Chip Reset Control  
Scan Enable  
D13  
F11  
F10  
F13  
G11  
G12  
H11  
G13  
H12  
F14  
H13  
H14  
J13  
J14  
N13  
N14  
P14  
L11  
P13  
M12  
P12  
K10  
N12  
Test_se  
U_RxAddr[0]  
U_RxAddr[1]  
U_RxAddr[2]  
U_RxAddr[3]  
U_RxAddr[4]  
U_RxCLAV [0]  
U_RxCLAV [1]  
U_RxCLAV [2]  
U_RxCLAV [3]  
U_RxCLAV [4]  
U_RxCLAV [5]  
U_RxCLAV [6]  
U_RxCLAV [7]  
U_RxData [0]  
U_RxData [1]  
U_RxData [2]  
U_RxData [3]  
U_RxData [4]  
U_RxData [5]  
U_RxData [6]  
U_RxData [7]  
U_RxData [8]  
Address of MPHY Device Being Polled or Selected  
Address of MPHY Device Being Polled or Selected  
Address of MPHY Device Being Polled or Selected  
Address of MPHY Device Being Polled or Selected  
Address of MPHY Device Being Polled or Selected  
Receive Cell Available—Normal/Extended PHY Port Control  
Receive Cell Available—Normal/Extended PHY Port Control  
Receive Cell Available—Normal/Extended PHY Port Control  
Receive Cell Available—Normal/Extended PHY Port Control  
Receive Cell Available—Extended PHY Port Control  
Receive Cell Available—Extended PHY Port Control  
Receive Cell Available—Extended PHY Port Control  
Receive Cell Available—Extended PHY Port Control  
Receive Data Bus, from the PHY Layer Device(s)  
Receive Data Bus, from the PHY Layer Device(s)  
Receive Data Bus, from the PHY Layer Device(s)  
Receive Data Bus, from the PHY Layer Device(s)  
Receive Data Bus, from the PHY Layer Device(s)  
Receive Data Bus, from the PHY Layer Device(s)  
Receive Data Bus, from the PHY Layer Device(s)  
Receive Data Bus, from the PHY Layer Device(s)  
Receive Data Bus, from the PHY Layer Device(s)  
96  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
Table 95. Pin Locations—BGA196 Package (continued)  
Ball  
P11  
N11  
M11  
M10  
J10  
K9  
Pin Name  
U_RxData [9]  
Signal Type  
BiDir LVTTL  
Description  
Receive Data Bus, from the PHY Layer Device(s)  
Receive Data Bus, from the PHY Layer Device(s)  
Receive Data Bus, from the PHY Layer Device(s)  
Receive Data Bus, from the PHY Layer Device(s)  
Receive Data Bus, from the PHY Layer Device(s)  
Receive Data Bus, from the PHY Layer Device(s)  
Receive Data Bus, from the PHY Layer Device(s)  
Enable Data Transfers—Normal/Extended PHY Port Control  
Enable Data Transfers—Extended PHY Port Control  
Enable Data Transfers—Extended PHY Port Control  
Enable Data Transfers—Extended PHY Port Control  
Enable Data Transfers—Extended PHY Port Control  
Enable Data Transfers—Extended PHY Port Control  
Enable Data Transfers—Extended PHY Port Control  
Enable Data Transfers—Extended PHY Port Control  
Receive Data Bus Parity Bit  
U_RxData [10]  
U_R xData [11]  
U_RxData [12]  
U_RxData [13]  
U_RxData [14]  
U_RxData [15]  
U_RxENB [0]  
U_RxENB [1]  
U_RxENB [2]  
U_RxENB [3]  
U_RxENB [4]  
U_RxENB [5]  
U_RxENB [6]  
U_RxENB [7]  
U_RxParity  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
Output LVTTL  
Output LVTTL  
Output LVTTL  
Output LVTTL  
Output LVTTL  
Output LVTTL  
Output LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
Bidir LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
Input LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
L9  
J12  
L14  
M14  
L13  
G10  
J9  
K11  
L12  
H10  
M13  
L10  
N10  
M9  
L8  
U_RxSOC  
Receive Start of Cell  
U_TxAddr[0]  
U_TxAddr[1]  
U_TxAddr[2]  
U_TxAddr[3]  
U_TxAddr[4]  
U_TxCLAV [0]  
U_TxCLAV [1]  
U_TxCLAV [2]  
U_TxCLAV [3]  
U_TxCLAV [4]  
U_TxCLAV [5]  
U_TxCLAV [6]  
U_TxCLAV [7]  
U_TxData [0]  
U_TxData [1]  
U_TxData [2]  
U_TxData [3]  
U_TxData [4]  
U_TxData [5]  
U_TxData [6]  
U_TxData [7]  
U_TxData [8]  
U_TxData [9]  
U_TxData [10]  
U_TxData [11]  
U_TxData [12]  
U_TxData [13]  
U_TxData [14]  
U_TxData [15]  
U_TxENB [0]  
Address of MPHY Device Being Polled or Selected  
Address of MPHY Device Being Polled or Selected  
Address of MPHY Device Being Polled or Selected  
Address of MPHY Device Being Polled or Selected  
Address of MPHY Device Being Polled or Selected  
Utopia Transmit Cell Available—Normal/Extended PHY Control  
Utopia Transmit Cell Available—Normal/Extended PHY Control  
Utopia Transmit Cell Available—Normal/Extended PHY Control  
Utopia Transmit Cell Available—Normal/Extended PHY Control  
Utopia Transmit Cell Available—Extended PHY Port Control  
Utopia Transmit Cell Available—Extended PHY Port Control  
Utopia Transmit Cell Available—Extended PHY Port Control  
Utopia Transmit Cell Available—Extended PHY Port Control  
Transmit Data Bus, toward the PHY Layer Device(s)  
Transmit Data Bus, toward the PHY Layer Device(s)  
Transmit Data Bus, toward the PHY Layer Device(s)  
Transmit Data Bus, toward the PHY Layer Device(s)  
Transmit Data Bus, toward the PHY Layer Device(s)  
Transmit Data Bus, toward the PHY Layer Device(s)  
Transmit Data Bus, toward the PHY Layer Device(s)  
Transmit Data Bus, toward the PHY Layer Device(s)  
Transmit Data Bus, toward the PHY Layer Device(s)  
Transmit Data Bus, toward the PHY Layer Device(s)  
Transmit Data Bus, toward the PHY Layer Device(s)  
Transmit Data Bus, toward the PHY Layer Device(s)  
Transmit Data Bus, toward the PHY Layer Device(s)  
Transmit Data Bus, toward the PHY Layer Device(s)  
Transmit Data Bus, toward the PHY Layer Device(s)  
Transmit Data Bus, toward the PHY Layer Device(s)  
Utopia Enable Data Transfers—Normal/Extended PHY Control  
N9  
M6  
P4  
N6  
K7  
K6  
L5  
K5  
N5  
M5  
P3  
N4  
P2  
M4  
L4  
N3  
P1  
M3  
M2  
N2  
N1  
M1  
L3  
K4  
K3  
P9  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
97  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
Table 95. Pin Locations—BGA196 Package (continued)  
Ball  
Pin Name  
U_TxENB [1]  
Signal Type  
Output LVTTL  
Output LVTTL  
Output LVTTL  
Output LVTTL  
Output LVTTL  
Output LVTTL  
Output LVTTL  
BiDir LVTTL  
Description  
Utopia Enable Data Transfers—Extended PHY Control  
Utopia Enable Data Transfers—Extended PHY Control  
Utopia Enable Data Transfers—Extended PHY Control  
Utopia Enable Data Transfers—Extended PHY Control  
Utopia Enable Data Transfers—Extended PHY Control  
Utopia Enable Data Transfers—Extended PHY Control  
Utopia Enable Data Transfers—Extended PHY Control  
Utopia Transmit Data Bus Parity Bit  
P7  
P6  
P5  
N7  
L7  
M7  
L6  
J5  
U_TxENB [2]  
U_TxENB [3]  
U_TxENB [4]  
U_TxENB [5]  
U_TxENB [6]  
U_TxENB [7]  
U_TxParity  
U_TxSOC  
M8  
P8  
BiDir LVTTL  
Transmit Start of Cell  
U_UDBClk  
Input LVTTL  
Utopia Down Bridge Clock Input  
K12  
U_UUBClk  
Input LVTTL  
Utopia Up-Bridge Clock Input  
References  
1. The ATM Forum UTOPIA Level 2, Version 1.0 Specification, af-phy-0039.000, June 1995  
2. ITU-T I.432.1, B-ISDN User Network Interface–Physical Layer Specification: General Characteristics, August  
1996.  
3. The ATM Forum User-Network Interface Specification, Version 3.1, Sept. 1994.  
4. IEEE 1149.1 Standard–JTAG.  
98  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
These devices have limited built-in ESD protection. The leads should be shorted together or the device placed in conductive foam  
during storage or handling to prevent electrostatic damage to the MOS gates.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
99  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS(1)(2)  
Supply Voltage I/O (VCCIO  
)
0.3V to 4V  
0.3V to 3.2V  
0.3V to 3.6V  
0.3V to (VCC +0.3V)  
0.3V to 3.6V  
Continuous  
Supply Voltage Core Internal (VCCINT  
CMOS/TTL Input and I/O Voltage  
CMOS/TTL Output Voltage  
LVDS DO/RIN Voltage  
)
LVDS Output Short Circuit Duration  
Junction Temperature  
+150°C  
Storage Temperature  
65°C to +125°C  
+225°C  
Lead Temperature (soldering, 10 seconds)  
Max. Package Power Dissipation Capacity  
Package Derating  
3.5 W  
28.6 mW/°C  
>3 kV HBM  
ESD Rating LVDS I/O  
ESD Rating CMOS I/O  
>2 kV HBM  
(1) Absolute Maximum Ratings are those values beyond which the safety of the device cannot be ensured. They are meant to imply that the  
devices should be operated at these limits. The table of Electrical Characteristics specifies conditions of device operation.  
(2) If Military/Aerospace specified devices are required, please contact the Texas Instruments Sales Office/Distributors for availability and  
specifications.  
RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS  
Min  
3.0  
2.37  
40  
0
Nom  
3.3  
2.5  
+25  
-
Max  
3.6  
Units  
V
Supply Voltage 3.3V  
Supply Voltage 2.5V  
2.63  
+85  
+3.6  
+3.3  
V
Operating Free Temperature  
CMOS/TTL Input and I/O Voltage  
LVDS Input/Output Voltage  
°C  
V
0
-
V
CMOS DC SPECIFICATIONS  
MICROPROCESSOR PINS, LVDS CONTROL PINS, AND CLOCKS  
Over recommended operating supply and temperature ranges unless otherwise specified.(1)  
Symbol  
VIH  
Parameter  
High Level Input Voltage  
Low Level Input Voltage  
Input Clamp Voltage  
Input Current  
Conditions  
Pin/Freq.  
Min  
2
Typ  
Max  
Units  
V
VCC  
0.8  
VIL  
VCL  
IIN  
GND  
V
Inputs  
0.7  
1.5  
+10  
V
VIN = 0V or 3.6V  
VIN = 0V  
10  
±2  
µA  
IINH  
Input Current for Pulldown  
pins  
80  
160  
µA  
IINL  
VOH  
VOL  
IOS  
Input Current for Pullup pins VIN = 3.6V  
90  
160  
VCC  
0.4  
µA  
V
High Level Output Voltage  
Low Level Output Voltage  
IOH = 6 mA  
IOL = 6 mA  
2.4  
GND  
15  
V
Outputs  
Output Short Circuit Current VOUT = 0V  
18  
85  
mA  
IOZ  
TRI-STATE Output Current PD* or REN = 0.8V,  
10  
±0.4  
+10  
µA  
VOUT = 0V or VCC  
V
(1) Typical values are given for VCC = 3.3V and TA = 25°C  
100  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
UTOPIA BUS DC SPECIFICATIONS  
Pin types are defined in Table 96.  
Over recommended operating supply and temperature ranges unless otherwise specified.(1)  
Symbol  
VIH  
Parameter  
High Level Input Voltage  
Low Level Input Voltage  
Input Clamp Voltage  
Input Current  
Conditions  
Pin/Freq.  
Min  
2
Typ  
Max  
VCC  
0.8  
Units  
V
VIL  
GND  
V
Inputs, BiDir  
VCL  
IIN  
0.7  
1.5  
+10  
VCC  
0.4  
V
VIN = 0V or 3.6V  
10  
2.4  
±2  
µA  
V
VOH  
VOL  
IOS  
IOZ  
High Level Output Voltage  
Low Level Output Voltage  
IOH = 8 mA  
IOL = 8 mA  
GND  
15  
V
Output, BiDir  
Output Short Circuit Current VOUT = 0V  
TRI-STATE Output Current PD* or REN = 0.8V,  
VOUT = 0V or VCC  
85  
mA  
10  
±0.4  
+10  
µA  
V
(1) Typical values are given for VCC = 3.3V and TA = 25°C  
BUS LVDS DC SPECIFICATIONS  
Over recommended operating supply and temperature ranges unless otherwise specified.(1)  
LVDS Specifications are for LVDS Input and Output pins only. Control inputs and clocks are specified under Control Pin and  
Clocks DC Specifications.  
Symbol  
VTH  
Parameter  
Conditions  
VCM = 1.1V  
Pin/Freq.  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Differential Threshold High  
Voltage  
+50  
+100  
mV  
VTL  
IIN  
Differential Threshold Low  
Voltage  
LVDS_ADin[+,]  
LVDS_BDin[+,]  
100 mV  
50  
mV  
Input Current  
VIN = +2.4V, VCC = 3.6V or 0V  
VIN = 0V, VCC = 3.6V or 0V  
RL = 100Ω  
10  
10  
±5  
±5  
+10  
+10  
µA  
µA  
VOD  
Output Differential Voltage  
(DO+)–(DO)  
350  
450  
550  
mV  
DVOD  
Output Differential Voltage  
Unbalance  
2
35  
1.3  
70  
mV  
V
VOS  
IOS  
Offset Voltage  
0.9  
1.0  
50  
LVDS_ADout[+,]  
LVDS_BDout[+,]  
Output Short Circuit Current DO = 0V, DIN = H, TXPWDN*  
and DEN = 2.4V  
35  
mA  
IOZ  
IOX  
TRI-STATE Output Current  
TXPWDN* or DEN = 0.8V,  
DO = 0V or VDD  
10  
10  
±1  
±1  
10  
10  
µA  
µA  
Power-Off Output Current  
VDD = 0V, DO = 0V or 3.6V  
(1) Typical values are given for VCC = 3.3V and TA = 25°C  
SUPPLY CURRENT, VCC = 2.5V  
Over recommended operating supply and temperature ranges unless otherwise specified.(1)  
Symbol  
ICCR  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Pin/Freq.  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Worst Case Supply Current  
Utopia CL = 15 pF, Bus  
LVDS RL = 100, Checker  
Pattern, CVDD = 2.63V  
52 MHz  
200  
260  
mA  
ICCT  
Typical Loading and  
Switching  
CL = 15 pF, PRBS7 Data  
Pattern  
33 MHz  
112  
140  
mA  
(1) Typical values are given for VCC = 3.3V and TA = 25°C  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
101  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
SUPPLY CURRENT, VCC = 3.3V  
Over recommended operating supply and temperature ranges unless otherwise specified.(1)  
Symbol  
ICCR  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Pin/Freq.  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Worst Case Supply Current  
Utopia CL = 15 pF, Bus  
LVDS RL = 100, Checker  
Pattern, VDD = 3.6V  
52 MHz  
270  
360  
165  
mA  
ICCT  
Typical Loading and  
Switching  
CL = 15 pF, PRBS7 Data  
Pattern  
33 MHz  
140  
mA  
(1) Typical values are given for VCC = 3.3V and TA = 25°C  
UTOPIA BUS SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS  
Over recommended operating supply and temperature ranges unless otherwise specified.(1)  
Symbol  
tUCP  
Parameter  
Input Clock Period  
Input Clock Duty Cycle  
Input Clock Jitter  
Conditions  
Pin/Freq.  
Min  
20  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
ns  
U_UUBClk,  
U_UDBClk  
tUDC  
40  
50  
1
60  
5
%
tUJIT  
%
tUSETUP  
tUHOLD  
tULH  
Input Data Valid before CLK CL = 30 pF (see Figure 31)  
4
1
ns  
Inputs  
Input Data Valid after CLK  
CL = 30 pF (see Figure 31)  
CL = 30 pF (see Figure 31)  
ns  
Output Low-to-High  
Transition Time  
1
1
4
8
8
ns  
ns  
ns  
tUHL  
Output High-to-Low  
Transition Time  
CL = 30 pF (see Figure 31)  
CL = 30 pF (see Figure 31)  
tUROS  
Output Data Valid before  
CLK  
Outputs  
tUROH  
tUHZR  
tULZR  
tUZHR  
tUZLR  
Output Data Valid after CLK CL = 30 pF (see Figure 31)  
High to TRI-STATE Delay  
1
1
1
1
1
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
16  
16  
16  
16  
Low to TRI-STATE Delay  
(See Figure 32)  
TRI-STATE to High Delay  
TRI-STATE to Low Delay  
(1) Typical values are given for VCC = 3.3V and TA = 25°C  
Pin Name  
U_TxData[15:0]  
U_Tx Parity  
ATM Mode  
Output  
Output  
Input  
PHY Mode  
Input  
Input  
U_Tx CLAV[7:4]  
U_TxCLAV[3:0]  
U_TxENB[7:1]  
U_TxENB[0]  
See(1)  
Output  
See(1)  
Input  
Input  
Output  
Output  
Output  
Output  
Input  
U_TxSOC  
Input  
U_TxAddr[4:0]  
U_RxData[15:0]  
U_Rx Parity  
Input  
Output  
Output  
See(1)  
Output  
See(1)  
Input  
Input  
U_Rx CLAV[7:4]  
U_RxCLAV[3:0]  
U_RxENB[7:1]  
U_RxENB[0]  
Input  
Input  
Output  
Output  
Input  
U_RxSOC  
Output  
Input  
U_RxAddr[4:0]  
Output  
(1) The extended addressing pins U_TxCLAV[7:4], U_RxCLAV[7:4], U_TxENB[7:1], and  
U_RxENB[7:1] are defined for ATM mode only.  
102  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
LVDS SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS  
Over recommended operating supply and temperature ranges unless otherwise specified.(1)  
Symbol  
tLLH  
Parameter  
LVDS Low-to-High Transition RL = 100, CL = 10 pF  
Time (See Figure 25)  
LVDS High-to-Low Transition RL = 100, CL = 10 pF  
Conditions  
Pin/Freq.  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
300  
400  
ps  
tLHL  
300  
60  
400  
150  
150  
ps  
ps  
ps  
Time  
(See Figure 25)  
LVDS_ADout[+,],  
LVDS_BDout[+.,]  
tRJIT  
tDJIT  
tDSR1  
Random Jitter of LVDS Tx  
Clock  
Deterministic Jitter of LVDS  
Tx Data  
Deserializer PLL Lock Time  
from PWRDN (with  
SYNCPAT)  
(See Figure 28)  
30  
12  
µs  
LVDS_ADin[+,],  
LVDS_BDin[+.,]  
tDRS2  
tRNM  
Deserializer PLL Lock Time  
from SYNCPAT  
(See Figure 29)  
(See Figure 30)  
µs  
ps  
Deserializer Noise Margin  
400  
(1) Typical values are given for VCC = 3.3V and TA = 25°C  
TIMING REQUIREMENTS FOR INPUT CLOCK  
LVDS_TXCLK, LVDS_AREFCLK, LVDS_BREFCLK  
Over recommended operating supply and temperature ranges unless otherwise specified.(1)  
Symbol  
tRFCP  
tRFDC  
tRFCP/tTCP Ratio of REFCLK to TCLK  
Parameter  
REFCLK Period  
REFCLK Duty Cycle  
Conditions  
Pin/Freq.  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
ns  
19.2  
40  
50  
60  
5
%
5  
%
tRFTT  
tJIT  
REFCLK Transition Time  
Input Jitter  
(See Figure 27)  
8
ns  
Jitter Frequency < 250 kHz  
Jitter Frequency < 250 kHz  
Jitter Frequency < 250 kHz  
15  
1.5  
0.15  
UI  
UI  
UI  
(1) Typical values are given for VCC = 3.3V and TA = 25°C  
MICROPROCESSOR INTERFACE SWITCHING CHARACTERISTICS  
Over recommended operating supply and temperature ranges unless otherwise specified.(1)  
Symbol  
tLLH  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Pin/Freq.  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
6
Units  
ns  
Low-to-High Transition Time CL = 15 pF (see Figure 26)  
High-to-Low Transition Time CL = 15 pF (see Figure 26)  
Outputs  
tLHL  
6
ns  
tSETUP  
tHOLD  
See Microprocessor Interface  
Operation  
Inputs  
(1) Typical values are given for VCC = 3.3V and TA = 25°C  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
103  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
Figure 25. LVDS Rise and Fall Times  
Figure 26. CMOS Rise and Fall Times  
Figure 27. REFCLK Transition Time  
Figure 28. Deserializer Lock Time tDSR1  
104  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
Figure 29. Deserializer Lock Time tDSR2  
Figure 30. Deserializer Noise Margin  
Figure 31. UTOPIA Setup and Hold Time Definition  
Figure 32. UTOPIA TRI-STATE Timing  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
105  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
Table 96. UTOPIA TRANSMIT TIMING  
Signal Name  
DIR  
Item  
Description  
TxClk Frequency (nominal)  
TxClk Duty Cycle  
Min  
0
Max  
U_UDBClk, U_UUBClk  
A P  
f1  
50 MHz  
60%  
5%  
tT2  
tT3  
tT4  
tT5  
tT6  
40%  
TxClk Peak-to-Peak Jitter  
TxClk Rise/Fall Time  
2 ns  
U_TxData[15:0],  
U_TxPrty, U_TxSOC,  
U_TxEnb[7:0],  
A P  
A P  
Input Setup to TxClk  
4 ns  
1 ns  
Input Hold from TxClk  
U_TxAddr[4:0]  
U_TxClav [7:0]  
tT7  
tT8  
Input Setup to TxClk  
4 ns  
1 ns  
4 ns  
0 ns  
1 ns  
1 ns  
Input Hold from TxClk  
tT9  
Signal Going Low Impedance to TxClk  
Signal Going High Impedance to TxClk (1)  
Signal Going Low Impedance from TxClk  
Signal Going High Impedance from TxClk  
tT10  
tT11  
tT12  
Table 97. UTOPIA RECEIVE TIMING  
Signal Name  
DIR  
Item  
f1  
Description  
RxClk Frequency (nominal)  
RxClk Duty Cycle  
Min  
0
Max  
50 MHz  
60%  
5%  
2 ns  
U_UDBClk, U_UUBClk  
A P  
tT2  
tT3  
tT4  
tT5  
tT6  
tT7  
tT8  
tT9  
tT10  
tT11  
tT12  
40%  
RxClk Peak-to-Peak Jitter  
RxClk Rise/Fall Time  
U_RxEnb[7:0],  
U_RxAddr[4:0]  
A P  
A P  
Input Setup to RxClk  
4 ns  
1 ns  
4 ns  
1 ns  
4 ns  
0 ns  
1 ns  
1 ns  
Input Hold from RxClk  
U_RxData[15:0],  
U_RxParity, U_RxSOC,  
U_RxClav [7:0]  
Input Setup to RxClk  
Input Hold from RxClk  
Signal Going Low Impedance to RxClk  
Signal Going High Impedance to RxClk (2)  
Signal Going Low Impedance from RxClk  
Signal Going High Impedance from RxClk  
106  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
APPENDIX A: LAYOUT AND CONNECTION GUIDELINES  
Figure 33. Block Diagram Is a Top View of 196 LBGA Ball Assignment.  
POWER CONNECTIONS  
Digital Supplies (DVDD and DGND)  
The digital supply pins provide power to the digital section of the device. Since the digital supplies are subject to  
switching noise, the bypass considerations are important. The DVDD and DGND balls are located mostly in the  
center of the ball array. If the PCB stack-up and signal routing allows placing bypass caps on the bottom of the  
board close to the digital supply pins, then an array of capacitors will provide wide band bypassing. The total  
bypass capacitance should be at least 0.3 µF.  
The 2.5V supply pins are located near the edge of the package, which is more convenient for placement of  
bypass capacitors. If a power plane supplies the 2.5V, then standard bypass capacitors of 0.1 µF in parallel with  
0.01 µF is sufficient. If the PCB traces connect the 2.5V to the part, then additional bulk decoupling capacitance  
should account for the added trace inductance.  
Analog Supplies (AVDD and AGND)  
The analog VDD and GND power the LVDS driver and receiver section of the device. High frequency bypassing  
such as 0.001 µF capacitance is required due to the very high data rates of the LVDS signals. See Figure 34.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
107  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
PLL Supplies (PVDD and PGND)  
The PLL supply pins provide power for the PLL(s) in the circuit. The most important function of bypassing or  
filtering for the PLL inputs is to attenuate low frequency noise from entering the PVDD pins. A common source of  
low frequency noise is switching power supplies. Power distribution networks should be designed to attenuate  
any harmonics created by the switching supply. The addition of a PI filter network at the PVDD pins is optional.  
See Figure 34.  
LAYOUT GUIDELINES  
Digital Supplies (DVDD and DGND)  
Digital supply connection to bypass capacitors can be difficult, but the more layers in the PCB the easier it is to  
place the capacitors near the device. Therefore, the recommendation is to use full power planes to distribute  
power to these pins. Using the minimum manufacturing thickness between the ground and power planes creates  
a distributed bypass capacitance. Due to the potentially high inrush currents caused by Utopia bus output  
switching, using traces routed through the array to connect bypass caps to the balls is not recommended. This is  
because the inductance of the traces will negate the affect of the bypass capacitors.  
Analog Supplies (AVDD and AGND)  
In general, the analog supply pins can be connected to the digital power planes. The AGND pins should be  
connected to a ground plane that connects them directly to the AGND pins of the sending device. This provides  
for minimum ground offset between the devices and provides a return path for the minute return currents from  
the LVDS receivers.  
PLL Supplies (PVDD and PGND)  
The PLL supply pins should be isolated from the shared digital and analog power planes. PVDD and PGND pins  
are generally grouped together to allow them to be connected to a split plane or to a “copper pour” on the top  
layer. The split plane or copper pour is connected to the power planes through a PI filter to block low frequency  
noise. High frequency bypassing should be provided on the PLL side of the filter to supply switching current to  
the PLL. A separate filter for each PLL is recommended. If filters are not desired use a high value (5 µF to 400  
nF) capacitor connected to the PVDD pins to limit low frequency noise.  
LVDS I/O  
The LVDS I/O pins are located on the outer ring of balls so they can be routed on the surface layer to minimize  
added capacitance. Use surface mount resistors to terminate transmission lines as close to the LVDS inputs as  
possible. The LVDS drivers on the DS92UT16 are designed to drive 100differential lines.  
The LVDS A driver outputs (LVDS_Adin[+/]) are swapped in position compared to the other LVDS I/O pairs.  
This allows them to be “wrapped around ” a connector pin array so that all of the LVDS signals can be routed on  
the surface layer. See Figure 35.  
108  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
www.ti.com  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
10 uH  
AVDD_3V3  
PVDD  
10 nF  
33 nF  
330 nF  
1 nF  
Repeat filter circuit for  
PVDDA and PVDDB  
VDD_3V3  
AVDD_3V3  
4.7 uF  
10 nF  
100 nF  
10 nF  
100 nF  
10 nF  
100 nF  
VDD_3V3  
DVDD_3V3  
4.7 uF  
1.0 uF  
100 nF  
1.0 uF  
100 nF  
1.0 uF  
100 nF  
VDD_2V5  
CVDD_2V5  
4.7 uF  
10 nF  
1 nF  
10 nF  
1 nF  
10 nF  
1 nF  
Place capacitor pairs close to  
core (2.5V) supply pins  
Figure 34. Recommended Bypassing and Filtering for the Analog and PLL Power Supplies on the  
DS92UT16 Utopia-LVDS Bridge  
Figure 35. Routing High-Speed LVDS Lines on one Layer to a Connector Header.  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
109  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
 
OBSOLETE  
DS92UT16  
SNOS992E JANUARY 2002REVISED APRIL 2013  
www.ti.com  
REVISION HISTORY  
Changes from Revision D (April 2013) to Revision E  
Page  
Changed layout of National Data Sheet to TI format ........................................................................................................ 109  
110  
Submit Documentation Feedback  
Copyright © 2002–2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  
Product Folder Links: DS92UT16  
IMPORTANT NOTICE  
Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, enhancements, improvements and other  
changes to its semiconductor products and services per JESD46, latest issue, and to discontinue any product or service per JESD48, latest  
issue. Buyers should obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and  
complete. All semiconductor products (also referred to herein as “components”) are sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale  
supplied at the time of order acknowledgment.  
TI warrants performance of its components to the specifications applicable at the time of sale, in accordance with the warranty in TI’s terms  
and conditions of sale of semiconductor products. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary  
to support this warranty. Except where mandated by applicable law, testing of all parameters of each component is not necessarily  
performed.  
TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or the design of Buyers’ products. Buyers are responsible for their products and  
applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with Buyers’ products and applications, Buyers should provide  
adequate design and operating safeguards.  
TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any patent right, copyright, mask work right, or  
other intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI components or services are used. Information  
published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license to use such products or services or a warranty or  
endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual property of the  
third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI.  
Reproduction of significant portions of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration  
and is accompanied by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered  
documentation. Information of third parties may be subject to additional restrictions.  
Resale of TI components or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that component or service  
voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated TI component or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice.  
TI is not responsible or liable for any such statements.  
Buyer acknowledges and agrees that it is solely responsible for compliance with all legal, regulatory and safety-related requirements  
concerning its products, and any use of TI components in its applications, notwithstanding any applications-related information or support  
that may be provided by TI. Buyer represents and agrees that it has all the necessary expertise to create and implement safeguards which  
anticipate dangerous consequences of failures, monitor failures and their consequences, lessen the likelihood of failures that might cause  
harm and take appropriate remedial actions. Buyer will fully indemnify TI and its representatives against any damages arising out of the use  
of any TI components in safety-critical applications.  
In some cases, TI components may be promoted specifically to facilitate safety-related applications. With such components, TI’s goal is to  
help enable customers to design and create their own end-product solutions that meet applicable functional safety standards and  
requirements. Nonetheless, such components are subject to these terms.  
No TI components are authorized for use in FDA Class III (or similar life-critical medical equipment) unless authorized officers of the parties  
have executed a special agreement specifically governing such use.  
Only those TI components which TI has specifically designated as military grade or “enhanced plastic” are designed and intended for use in  
military/aerospace applications or environments. Buyer acknowledges and agrees that any military or aerospace use of TI components  
which have not been so designated is solely at the Buyer's risk, and that Buyer is solely responsible for compliance with all legal and  
regulatory requirements in connection with such use.  
TI has specifically designated certain components as meeting ISO/TS16949 requirements, mainly for automotive use. In any case of use of  
non-designated products, TI will not be responsible for any failure to meet ISO/TS16949.  
Products  
Applications  
Audio  
www.ti.com/audio  
amplifier.ti.com  
dataconverter.ti.com  
www.dlp.com  
Automotive and Transportation www.ti.com/automotive  
Communications and Telecom www.ti.com/communications  
Amplifiers  
Data Converters  
DLP® Products  
DSP  
Computers and Peripherals  
Consumer Electronics  
Energy and Lighting  
Industrial  
www.ti.com/computers  
www.ti.com/consumer-apps  
www.ti.com/energy  
dsp.ti.com  
Clocks and Timers  
Interface  
www.ti.com/clocks  
interface.ti.com  
logic.ti.com  
www.ti.com/industrial  
www.ti.com/medical  
Medical  
Logic  
Security  
www.ti.com/security  
Power Mgmt  
Microcontrollers  
RFID  
power.ti.com  
Space, Avionics and Defense  
Video and Imaging  
www.ti.com/space-avionics-defense  
www.ti.com/video  
microcontroller.ti.com  
www.ti-rfid.com  
www.ti.com/omap  
OMAP Applications Processors  
Wireless Connectivity  
TI E2E Community  
e2e.ti.com  
www.ti.com/wirelessconnectivity  
Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265  
Copyright © 2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated  

相关型号:

DS9481R

DS9481R USB-to-1-Wire/iButton Adapter Evaluates: 1-Wire Slave and iButton Devices
MAXIM

DS9481R-3C7

DS9481R USB-to-1-Wire/iButton Adapter Evaluates: 1-Wire Slave and iButton Devices
MAXIM

DS9490

USB to 1-Wire/iButton Adapter
ETC

DS9490B

USB to 1-Wire/iButton Adapter
DALLAS

DS9490B

USB to 1-Wire/iButton Adapter
MAXIM

DS9490R

USB to 1-Wire/iButton Adapter
DALLAS

DS9490R

USB to 1-Wire/iButton Adapter
MAXIM

DS9490R_11

USB to 1-Wire/iButton Adapters High-Speed 12Mbps Universal Serial Bus (USB) Interface
MAXIM

DS9502

ESD Protection Diode
DALLAS

DS9502P

ESD Protection Diode
DALLAS

DS9502P

Trans Voltage Suppressor Diode, Unidirectional, 1 Element, Silicon, 3.70 X 4 MM, 1.50 MM HEIGHT, TSOC-6
MAXIM

DS9502P+T&R

Trans Voltage Suppressor Diode, Unidirectional, 1 Element, Silicon, 3.70 X 4 MM, 1.50 MM HEIGHT, TSOC-6
MAXIM